Owner's Identification

This Owner’s Manual should be considered

a permanent part of the car, and should

remain with the car when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models of

the Civic 4-door. You may find descriptions

of equipment and features that are not on

your particular model.

The information and specifications included

in this publication were in effect at the time

of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,

Ltd. reserves the right, however, to

discontinue or change specifications or

design at any time without notice and

without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identification

Si prefiere este Manual del

Propietario en español,

comuníquese con el concesionario

Honda.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez

besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur

en français, veuillez demander à

votreconcessionnairede

commander le numéro de pièce

33S5AC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

01/06/02 16:43:36 31S5A610_001

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet

thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights

and responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you will

find information that is preceded by

a symbol. This

information is intended to help you

avoid damage to your Honda, other

property, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to

read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and

convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you

can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps

to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When

your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff is

specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. Your

Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer

any questions and concerns.

Congratulations Your selection of a 2002 Honda Civic was a wise

investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Introduction

WARNING:

01/06/02 16:43:43 31S5A610_002

To help you make informed

decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and

other information on labels and in

this manual. This information alerts

you to potential hazards that could

hurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,

including:

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it

carefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important

Safety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,

is very important. And operating this

car safely is an important

responsibility.

Of course, it is not practical or

possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or

maintaining your car. You must use

your own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

AFewWordsAboutSafety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY

HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

instructions.

01/06/02 16:43:56 31S5A610_003

Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.

ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-

ties, and technical information.

How to order manuals and other

technical literature.

A summary of the warranties

covering your new Honda, and

how to contact us for any reason.

Refer to your warranty manual for

detailed information.

Important information about the

proper use and care of your car’s

seat belts, an overview of the

Supplemental Restraint System,

and valuable information on how

to protect children with child

restraints.

Explains the purpose of each

instrument panel indicator and

gauge, and how to use the controls

on the dashboard and steering

column.

A summary of information you need

when you pull up to the fuel pump.

How to operate the heating and air

conditioning system, the audio

system, and other convenience

features.

What gasoline to use, how to

break-in your new car, and how to

load luggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,

shift the transmission, and park.

The Maintenance Schedule shows

you when you need to take your

car to the dealer. There is also a

list of things to check and

instructions on how to check them.

Tips on cleaning and protecting

your car. Also some things to look

for if your car ever needs body

repairs.

This section covers several

problems motorists sometimes

experience, and details how to

handle them.

Contents

...............Your Car at a Glance . 2

....Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.....................................Index . I

Service Information Summary

.....Instruments and Controls . 57

Comfort and Convenience

............................Features . 105

...................Before Driving . 163

..............................Driving . 177

......................Maintenance . 195

................Appearance Care . 257

Taking Care of the

.......................Unexpected . 265

.........Technical Information . 293

Warranty and Customer

Relations

........(U.S. and Canada only) . 307

Authorized Manuals

.........................(U.S.only) .311

01/06/02 16:44:18 31S5A610_004

Your Car at a Glance

AAIIRRBBAAGGSS

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

((PP.. 111144,, 112266,, 113388))

((PP.. 111199,, 113311,, 114433))

((PP.. 110066))

PPOOWWEERR

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK

SSWWIITTCCHH

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

((PP.. 1100,, 4488))

((PP.. 8822))

((PP.. 9933))

((PP.. 116655))

((PP.. 8866))

((PP.. 116666))

((PP.. 118822))

((PP.. 118800))

01/06/02 16:44:22 31S5A610_005

Your Car at a Glance

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS

((PP.. 7700,, 7722))

((PP.. 7744))

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH

((PP.. 7722,, 7744))

((PP.. 9955))

((PP.. 115599))

((PP.. 9966)) ((PP.. 7766))

((PP.. 116600))

((PP.. 7755))

01/06/02 16:44:27 31S5A610_006

01/06/02 16:44:29 31S5A610_007

This section gives you important

information about how to protect

yourself and your passengers. It

shows you how to use seat belts

properly. It explains your Supple-

mental Restraint System. And it tells

you how to properly restrain infants

andchildreninyourcar.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11

..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11

........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13

.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13

............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16

5. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 16

....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 18

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

........................Protecting Children . 22

All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 22

Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 23

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to

...............................Children . 23

If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 25

If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 26

...Additional Safety Precautions . 26

General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 27

.......................Protecting Infants . 31

.........Protecting Small Children . 35

.......Protecting Larger Children . 38

Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 42

.............................Using LATCH . 43

Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 45

..Seat Belt System Components . 45

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 45

Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 46

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 47

Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 48

........................SRS Components . 48

How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 48

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50

How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 51

How the Side Airbag Cut-off

...........Indicator Light Works . 52

.............................Airbag Service . 53

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Safety Labels . 55

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:44:35 31S5A610_008

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed the greater the

risk, but serious accidents can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current

conditions, regardless of the

maximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, they

can cause serious or fatal injuries to

occupants who sit too close to them,

or are not properly restrained.

Infants, young children, and short

adults are at the greatest risk. Be

sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual. (See page

Having a tire blowout or a

mechanical failure can be extremely

hazardous. To reduce the possibility

of such problems, check your tire

pressures and condition frequently,

and perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safety

recommendations throughout this

section, and throughout this manual.

Therecommendationsonthispage

are the ones we consider to be the

most important.

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of collisions. Airbags

supplement seat belts, but airbags

are designed to inflate only in a

moderate to severe frontal collision.

So even though your car is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and

your passengers always wear your

seat belts, and wear them properly.

(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even

one drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions, and

your reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drink

and drive, and don’t let your friends

drink and drive, either.

Children are safest when they are

properly restrained in the back seat,

notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo

smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly

restrained in a child safety seat. (See

page .)

200

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe Condition

Don’t Drink and Drive

01/06/02 16:44:49 31S5A610_009

Your car is equipped with many

features that work together to

protect you and your passengers

during a crash.

Some safety features do not require

anyactiononyourpart.These

include a strong steel framework

that forms a safety cage around the

passenger compartment; front and

rear crush zones that are designed to

crumple and absorb energy during a

crash; a collapsible steering column;

and seat belt tensioners that

automatically tighten the front seat

belts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

((44))

((55))

((66))

((22))

((88))

((99))

((88))

((77))

((1100)) ((11)) ((33))

((22))

((77))

((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee

((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonnee

((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss

((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss

((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn

((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss

((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss

((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss

((OOppttiioonnaall oonn UU..SS.. mmooddeellss oonnllyy))

((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss

((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss

01/06/02 16:44:59 31S5A610_010

Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof

your passengers, your car is

equipped with seat belts in all seating

positions.

These safety features are designed

to reduce the severity of injuries in a

crash. However, you and your

passengers can’t take full advantage

of these safety features unless you

remain sitting in a proper position

and

In fact, some safety

features can contribute to injuries if

they are not used properly.

Your seat belt system also

includes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you and

your passengers to fasten your seat

belts.

Seat belts are the single most

effective safety device for adults and

larger children. (Infants and smaller

children must be properly restrained

in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly

increases the chance of serious

injury or death in a crash, even

though your car has airbags.

In addition, most states and all

Canadian provinces require you to

wear seat belts.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

always wear your seat belts

properly.

Why Wear Seat Belts

01/06/02 16:45:08 31S5A610_011

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost every

type of crash, including frontal,

side, and rear impacts and

rollovers.

Help keep you from being thrown

against the inside of the vehicle

and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out

of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position

should the airbags ever deploy. A

good position reduces the risk of

injury from an inflating airbag, and

allows you to get the best

advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot

completely protect you in every

crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts

can reduce your risk of serious

injury.

Always wear

your seat belt, and make sure you

wear it properly.

Keep you connected to the vehicle

so you can take advantage of the

vehicle’s built-in safety features.

What you should do:

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not wearing a seat belt properly

increases the chance of serious

injury or death in a crash, even

if you have airbags.

Be sure you and your

passengers always wear seat

belts and wear them properly.

01/06/02 16:45:19 31S5A610_012

Your car has a Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) with front

airbags to help protect the heads and

chests of the driver and a front seat

passenger during a moderate to

severe frontal collision.

Your car also has side airbags to help

protect the upper torso of the driver

or a front seat passenger during a

moderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you need

to know about your airbags are:

Always wear

your seat belt properly, and sit

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel or

dashboard.

To do their job, airbags must

inflate with tremendous force and

speed. So while airbags help save

lives, they can cause minor injuries,

or more serious or even fatal

injuries if occupants are not

properly restrained or sitting

properly.

They are designed to supplement

the seat belts.

Only on U.S. models equipped with side

airbags.

Airbags

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags offer no protection in rear

impacts, rollovers, or minor

frontal or side collisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

01/06/02 16:45:31 31S5A610_013

How you adjust your seats and seat-

backs can also affect your safety. For

example, sitting too close to the

steering wheel or dashboard

increases the risk of you or your

passenger being injured by striking

theinsideofthecar,orbyan

inflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reduces

the seat belt’s effectiveness and

increases the chance that the seat’s

occupant will slide under the seat

belt in a crash and be seriously

injured.

Head restraints can help protect you

from whiplash and other injuries. For

maximum protection, the back of

your head should rest against the

center of the head restraint.

Your car’s seats are designed to keep

you in a comfortable, upright

position so you can take full

advantage of the protection offered

by seat belts and the energy

absorbing materials in the seats.

Move the front

seats as far back as possible, and

keep adjustable seat-backs in an

upright position whenever the car is

moving.

Keeping your doors locked reduces

thechanceofbeingthrownoutof

the car during a crash. It also helps

prevent occupants from accidentally

opening a door and falling out, and

outsiders from unexpectedly opening

your doors.

Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door Locks

What you should do:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

01/06/02 16:45:41 31S5A610_014

All adults, and children who have

outgrown child safety seats, are

wearing their seat belts and

wearingthemproperly(seepage

Any infant or small child is

properly restrained in a child seat

inthebackseat(seepage ).

To make sure you and your

passengers get the maximum

protection from your car’s safety

features, check the following each

time before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives more

detailed information about how you

can maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safety

system can prevent all injuries or

deaths that can occur in severe

crashes, even when seat belts are

properly worn and the airbags deploy.

All cargo is properly stored or

secured (see page ).

All doors are closed and locked

(see page ).

Head restraints are properly

adjusted (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page

Frontseatoccupantsaresitting

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel and

dashboard (see page ).

173

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:45:53 31S5A610_015

The following pages provide

instructions on how to properly

protect the driver and other adult

occupants.

These instructions also apply to

children who have outgrown child

seats and are large enough to wear

lap/shoulder belts. (See page for

important additional guidelines on

how to properly protect larger

children.)

Any driver who sits too close to the

steering wheel is at risk of being

seriously injured or killed by striking

the steering wheel or from being

struck by an inflating front airbag

during a crash.

After everyone has entered the car,

be sure the doors are closed and

locked.

For safety, locking the doors reduces

the chance that a passenger,

especially a child, will open a door

while the car is moving and

accidentally fall out. It also reduces

the chance of someone being thrown

out of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors can

prevent an outsider from

unexpectedly opening a door when

you come to a stop.

See page for how to lock the

doors.

CONTINUED

Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:46:05 31S5A610_016

See page for how to adjust the

front seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure

the seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get far

enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the pedals.

However, if you are concerned about

sitting too close, we recommend that

you investigate whether some type

of adaptive equipment may help.

To reduce the chance of injury, wear

your seat belt properly, sit upright

with your back against the seat, and

movetheseatawayfromthe

steering wheel to the farthest

distance that allows you to maintain

full control of the car.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that drivers

adjust the seat so the center of the

chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)

away from the center of the steering

wheel.Alsomakesureyourfront

seat passenger moves the seat as far

to the rear as possible.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting too close to a front

airbag can result in serious

injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the

front airbags as possible.

01/06/02 16:46:14 31S5A610_017

See page for how to adjust seat-

backs.

A front passenger should also adjust

the seat-back to an upright position,

but as far from the dashboard as

possible. A passenger who sits too

close to the dashboard could be

injured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer

rests against the occupant’s chest

reduces the protective capability of

the belt. It also increases the chance

of sliding under the belt in a crash

and being seriously injured. The

farther a seat-back is reclined, the

greater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

comfortable, upright position,

leaving ample space between your

chest and the airbag cover in the

center of the steering wheel. If you

sit too close to the steering wheel,

you could be injured if the front

airbag inflates.

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Reclining the seat-back too far

can result in serious injury or

death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position and sit well

back in the seat.

01/06/02 16:46:22 31S5A610_018

Before driving, make sure everyone

with an adjustable head restraint has

properly positioned the head

restraint. The restraint should be

positioned so the back of the

occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. A taller

person should adjust the restraint as

high as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraints

will help protect occupants from

whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the

head restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,

then tug on the belt to make sure the

belt is securely latched. Also check

that the belt is not twisted, because a

twisted belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash.

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts

4. 5.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

Improperly positioning head

restraints reduces their

effectiveness and you can be

seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are

in place and positioned properly

before driving.

01/06/02 16:46:33 31S5A610_019

Position the lap part of the belt as

low as possible across your hips,

then pull up on the shoulder part of

the belt so the lap part fits snugly.

This lets your strong pelvic bones

take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack from the

shoulder part, then check that the

belt rests across the center of your

chest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash over

the strongest bones in your upper

body.

If the seat belt touches or crosses

your neck, or if it crosses your arm

instead of your shoulder, you need to

adjust the seat belt anchor height.

To adjust the height of a front seat

belt anchor, squeeze the two release

buttons and slide the anchor up or

down as needed (it has four

positions).

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly positioning the seat

belts can cause serious injury

or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before

driving.

01/06/02 16:46:42 31S5A610_020

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,

so that the wheel points toward your

chest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel toward

your chest provides optimal

protection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust the

steering wheel.

If a seat belt does not seem to work

as it should, it may not protect the

occupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that is

not working properly can be

seriously injured or killed. Have your

Honda dealer check the belt as soon

as possible.

See page for additional

information about your seat belt

system and how to take care of your

belts.

This could cause

very serious injuries in a crash.

Adjust the Steering Wheel6.

No one should

sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt.

Never place the shoulder portion of a

lap/shoulder belt under your arm or

behind your back.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults

01/06/02 16:46:51 31S5A610_021

After all occupants have adjusted

their seats and put on seat belts, it is

very important that they continue to

sit upright, well back in their seats,

with their feet on the floor, until the

car is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the

chance of injury during a crash. For

example, if an occupant slouches,

lies down, turns sideways, sits

forward, leans forward or sideways,

or puts one or both feet up, the

chance of injury during a crash is

greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of

position in the front seat can be

seriously or fatally injured by

striking interior parts of the car, or

by being struck by an inflating front

airbag. Being struck by an inflating

side airbag can result in possibly

serious injuries.

Remember, to get the best

protection from your car’s airbags

and other safety features, you must

sit properly and wear your seat belt

properly.

Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Sitting improperly or out of

position can result in serious

injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in

the seat, with your feet on the

floor.

01/06/02 16:46:59 31S5A610_022

Because protecting the mother is the

best way to protect her unborn child,

a pregnant woman should always

wear a seat belt whenever she drives

or rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion of

the belt as low as possible across

your hips.

Pregnant women should also sit

upright and as far back as possible

from the steering wheel or

dashboard. This will reduce the risk

of injuries to both the mother and

her unborn child that can be caused

by a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, ask

your doctor if it’s okay for you to

drive.

If they do, they

could be very seriously injured in a

crash.

Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

shoulder part of a seat belt can

severely compromise the

protective capability of the seat

belt and increase the chance of

serious injury in a crash.

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions

Two people should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seat

belts.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:47:10 31S5A610_023

Carrying hard or sharp

objects on your lap, or driving with

a pipe or other sharp object in

your mouth, can result in injuries

if your front airbag inflates.

Any object

attached to or placed on the covers

marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the

center of the steering wheel and

on top of the dashboard could

interfere with the proper operation

of the airbags. Or, if the airbags

inflate, the objects could be

propelled inside the car and hurt

someone.

If your

hands or arms are close to the

airbag cover in the center of the

steering wheel or on top of the

dashboard, they could be injured if

the front airbags inflate.

If a side airbag

inflates,acupholderorotherhard

object attached on or near the

door could be propelled inside the

car and hurt someone.

Do not place hard or sharp objects

between yourself and a front

airbag.

Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms away

from the airbag covers.

On U.S. models with side airbags,

do not attach hard objects on or

near a front door.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:47:17 31S5A610_024

(See page

To reduce the number of child

deaths and injuries, every state and

Canadian province requires that

infants and children be restrained

whenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injured

or killed in vehicle crashes because

they are either unrestrained or not

properly restrained. In fact, vehicle

accidents are the number one cause

of death of children ages 12 and

under.

Children depend on adults to protect

them. However, despite their best

intentions, many parents and other

adults may not know how to

protect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you ever

need to drive with a grandchild or

otherchildreninyourcar,besureto

read this section.

(See page

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara

seat belt should be properly

restrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always be

restrained with a seat belt.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Children who are unrestrained

or improperly restrained can be

seriously injured or killed in a

crash.

Any child too small for a seat

belt should be properly

restrained in a child seat. A

larger child should be properly

restrained with a seat belt.

01/06/02 16:47:28 31S5A610_025

Front airbags have been designed to

help protect adults in a moderate to

severe frontal collision. To do this,

the passenger’s front airbag is quite

large, and it inflates with tremendous

speed.

the airbag inflates, it can hit the back

of the child seat with enough force

to kill or very seriously injure an

infant.

According to accident statistics,

children of all ages and sizes are

safer when they are restrained in the

back seat, not the front seat. The

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that all children

ages 12 and under be properly

restrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are less

likely to be injured by striking hard

interior parts during a collision or

hard braking. Also, children cannot

be injured by an inflating airbag

when they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing a

seat belt in a crash, you could be

thrown forward into the

dashboard and crush the child.

Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the

child can be torn from your arms

during a crash. For example, if

your car crashes into a parked

vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a

20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a

600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will

not be able to hold on.

During a

crash, the belt could press deep

into the child and cause very

serious injuries.

CONTINUED

The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to Children

Children Should Sit in the Back

Seat

Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag.

Additional Precautions to Parents

Neverholdaninfantorchildon

your lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourself

and an infant or child.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:47:41 31S5A610_026

To remind you of the passenger’s

front airbag hazards, and that

children must be properly restrained

in the back seat, your car has

warninglabelsonthedashboardand

on the driver’s and front passenger’s

visors. Please read and follow the

instructions on these labels.

Whenever possible,

larger children should sit in the back

seat, properly restrained with a seat

belt. (See page for important

information about protecting larger

children.)

If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is

thrown forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can strike the

child with enough force to kill or

very seriously injure a small child.

U.S. ModelsSmall Children

Children who have outgrown child

seats are also at risk of being injured

or killed by an inflating passenger’s

front airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag can

be hazardous.

Larger Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:47:52 31S5A610_027

To remind you of the front airbag

hazards, your car has warning labels

on the driver’s and front passenger’s

visors. Please read and follow the

instructions on these labels.

Your car has three seating positions

in the back seat where children can

be properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more than

three children in your car:

Place the largest child in the front

seat, provided the child is large

enough to wear a seat belt

properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to the

rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well

backintheseat(seepage ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

If You Must Drive with Several

Children

Canadian Models

01/06/02 16:48:07 31S5A610_028

Even very young

children learn how to unlock

vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,

and open the trunk, which can

lead to accidental injury or death.

Children

who play in cars can accidentally

get trapped inside the trunk.

Teach your children not to play in

or around cars. Know how to

operate the emergency trunk

opener (U.S. models only) and

decide if your children should be

shown how to use this feature (see

page ).

Leaving children without

adult supervision is illegal in most

states and Canadian provinces,

and can be very hazardous. For

example, infants and small

childrenleftinavehicleonahot

day can die from heatstroke. And

children left alone with the key in

the ignition can accidentally set

the vehicle in motion, possibly

injuring themselves or others.

Using this feature will

prevent children from opening the

doors and accidentally falling out

(see page ).

Using

this feature will prevent children

from playing with the windows,

which could expose them to

hazards or distract the driver (see

page ).

Many parents say they prefer to put

an infant or small child in the front

passenger seat so they can watch the

child, or because the child requires

attention.

Placing a child in the front seat

exposes the child to hazards from

the passenger’s front airbag, and

paying close attention to a child

distracts the driver from the

important tasks of driving, placing

both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attention

or frequent visual contact, we

strongly recommend that another

adult ride with the child in the back

seat. The back seat is far safer for a

child than the front.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Keep car keys and remote

transmitters out of the reach of

children.

Lock all doors and the trunk when

your vehicle is not in use.

Do not leave children alone in your

vehicle.

Use childproof door locks to

prevent children from opening the

doors.

Use the main power window

switch to prevent children from

opening the rear windows.

Additional Safety PrecautionsIf a Child Requires Close

Attention

01/06/02 16:48:19 31S5A610_029

The following pages give general

guidelines for selecting and installing

child seats for infants and small

children.

To provide proper protection, a child

seat should meet three

requirements:

The child seat should

meet Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)

or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look

for the manufacturer’s statement

of compliance on the box and seat.

Childrenuptoaboutone

year old should be restrained in a

rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only

a rear-facing seat provides the

proper support to protect an infant’s

head, neck, and back. See page

for additional information on

protecting infants.

CONTINUED

General Guidelines for Using

Child Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safety

standards.

The child seat should be of the

proper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:48:30 31S5A610_030

Before purchasing a child seat, we

recommend that parents test the

child seat in the specific vehicle

seating position (or positions) where

they intend to use the seat. If a

previously purchased child seat does

not fit, you may need to buy a

different one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design of

child seats, vehicle seats, and seat

belts, all child seats will not fit all

vehicle seating positions.

A child who is too

large for a rear-facing child seat, and

who can sit up without support,

should be restrained in a forward-

facing child seat. See page for

additional information on protecting

small children.

However, Honda is confident that

one or more child seat models can fit

andbeproperlyinstalledinall

recommended seating positions in

your car.

Your car has lower anchors installed

for use with LATCH (Lower

AnchorsandTethersforChildren)-

compatible child seats. For more

information, see page .

The child seat should fit the

vehicle seating position (or

positions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:48:40 31S5A610_031

This page briefly summarizes

Honda’s recommendations on where

to place rear-facing and forward-

facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, due

to the front airbag hazard.

The passenger’s front airbag

inflates with enough force to kill

or seriously injure an infant in a

rear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facing

child seat is also at risk. If the

vehicle seat is too far forward,

or the child’s head is thrown

forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can kill or

seriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in the

front, follow the instructions

provided in this section.

Recommended positions.

Properlysecurearear-facingchild

seat (see page ).

Not recommended,

due to the front airbag hazard. If a

small child must ride in front,

move the vehicle seat to the rear-

most position and secure a

forward-facing child seat with the

seat belt (see page ).

Recommended

positions. Properly secure a

forward-facing child seat

(see page ).

CONTINUED

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat

Infants:

Back Seats

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose Serious

Risks to Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:48:54 31S5A610_032

After selecting a proper child seat,

and a good position to install the seat,

there are three main steps in

installing the seat:

Make sure the child is properly

strappedinthechildseat

according to the child seat maker’s

instructions. A child who is not

properly secured in a child seat

canbethrownoutoftheseatina

crash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normal

driving maneuvers as well as during

a collision, we recommend that

parents secure a child seat as firmly

as possible.

If the child seat is not secure, try

installing it in a different seating

position, or use a different style of

child seat that can be firmly secured

in the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,

either remove it and store it in a safe

place, or make sure it is properly

secured. An unsecured child seat can

be thrown around the car during a

crash or sudden stop and injure

someone.

However, a child seat does not need

to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles

or seating positions, it may be

difficult to install a child seat so that

it does not move at all. Some side-to-

side or back-and-forth movement can

be expected and should not reduce

the child seat’s effectiveness.

After installing a child

seat, push and pull the seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure.

All child seats are

designed to be secured to the car

with the lap part of a lap/shoulder

belt. Some child seats can be

secured to the vehicle’s LATCH

anchorage system instead. A child

whose seat is not properly secured

to the car can be endangered in a

crash. See pages , and for

instructions on how to properly

secure child seats in this car.

4332 36

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Make sure the child seat is firmly

secured.

Properly secure the child seat to

the car.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:49:06 31S5A610_033

Only a rear-facing child seat provides

proper support for a baby’s head,

neck, and back. Infants up to about

one year of age must be restrained in

a rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seat

can be placed in any seating position

in the back seat, but not in the front

seat.

Two types of seats may be used: a

seat designed exclusively for infants,

or a convertible seat used in the rear-

facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant be

restrained in a rear-facing child seat

until the infant reaches the seat

maker’s weight or height limit and is

able to sit up without support.

If the passenger’s

front airbag inflates, it can hit the

back of the child seat with enough

force to kill or seriously injure an

infant. If an infant must be closely

watched, we recommend that

another adult sit in the back seat

with the baby.

If placed

facing forward, an infant could be

very seriously injured during a

frontal collision.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in

a forward-facing position.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Placing a rear-facing child seat

in the front seat can result in

serious injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing child

seat in the back seat, not the

front.

01/06/02 16:49:18 31S5A610_034

With the child seat in the desired

back seating position, route the

belt through the child seat

according to the seat maker’s

instructions, then insert the latch

plate into the buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the back

seats have a locking mechanism that

must be activated to secure a child

seat.

The following pages provide

instructions and tips on how to

secure a rear-facing child seat with

this type of seat belt.

When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the

driver or a front-seat passenger from

moving the seat as far back as

recommended (see page ). Or it

may prevent them from locking the

seat-back in the desired upright

position (see page ).

In either case, we recommend that

you place the child seat directly

behind the front passenger seat,

move the front seat as far forward as

needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or

you may wish to get a smaller child

seat that allows you to safely carry a

front passenger.

If you have a child seat designed to

be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH

anchorage system, follow the

instructions on page .

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:49:28 31S5A610_035

Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure enough to

stay upright during normal driving

maneuvers. If the child seat is not

secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to

retract fully, then repeat these

steps.

After confirming that the belt is

locked, grab the shoulder part of

the belt near the buckle and pull

up to remove any slack from the

lap part of the belt. Remember, if

the lap part of the belt is not tight,

the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help to

putweightonthechildseat,or

push on the back of the seat, while

pulling up on the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,

slowly pull the shoulder part of the

belt all the way out until it stops,

then let the belt feed back into the

retractor (you might hear a

clicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not

be able to pull it out. If you can pull

the belt out, it is not locked and

you will need to repeat these steps.

4. 5.2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:49:38 31S5A610_036

Forproperprotection,aninfantmust

ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined

position. To determine the proper

reclining angle, check with the baby’s

doctor or follow the seat maker’s

recommendations.

To achieve the desired reclining

angle, it may help to put a rolled up

towel under the toe of the child seat,

as shown.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,

unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat

belt, and let the belt fully retract.

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

Tips

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:49:45 31S5A610_037

A child who can sit up without

support, and who fits within the child

seat maker’s weight and height

limits, should be restrained in a

forward-facing, upright child seat.

In this car, the best place to install a

forward-facing child seat is in one of

the seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat is

too far forward, or the child’s head is

thrown forward during a collision, an

inflating front airbag can strike the

child with enough force to cause

very serious or fatal injuries. If a

small child must be closely watched,

we recommend that another adult sit

in the back seat with the child.

We also recommend that a small

child stay in the child seat as long as

possible, until the child reaches the

weight or height limit for the seat.

Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-

point harness system as shown.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equipped

with a passenger’s front airbag can

be hazardous.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:49:56 31S5A610_038

With the child seat in the desired

seating position, route the belt

through the child seat according

to the seat maker’s instructions,

then insert the latch plate into the

buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the back

and front passenger seating positions

have a locking mechanism that must

be activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provide

instructions on how to secure a

forward-facing child seat with this

type of seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-

facing child seat in the front, move

the vehicle seat as far to the rear as

possible, be sure the child seat is

firmly secured to the car, and the

child is properly strapped in the seat.

If you have a child seat designed to

be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH

anchorage system, follow the

instructions on page .

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Improperly placing a forward-

facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury

or death if the front airbags

inflate.

Ifyoumustplaceaforward-

facing child seat in front, move

the vehicle seat as far back as

possible and properly restrain

the child.

01/06/02 16:50:07 31S5A610_039

Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure enough to

stay upright during normal driving

maneuvers. If the child seat is not

secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to

retract fully, then repeat these

steps.

After confirming that the belt is

locked, grab the shoulder part of

the belt near the buckle and pull

up to remove any slack from the

lap part of the belt. Remember, if

the lap part of the belt is not tight,

the child seat will not be secure. It

mayhelptoputweightonthe

child seat, or push on the back of

the seat, while pulling up on the

belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,

slowly pull the shoulder part of the

belt all the way out until it stops,

then let the belt feed back into the

retractor (you might hear a

clicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug on

it. If the belt is locked, you will not

be able to pull it out. If you can pull

the belt out, it is not locked and

you will need to repeat these steps.

4. 5.2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:50:16 31S5A610_040

When a child reaches the

recommended weight or height limit

for a forward-facing child seat, the

child should sit in the back seat and

wear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulder

part of the belt to properly fit, we

recommend that the child use a

booster seat until the child is tall

enough to use the seat belt without a

booster.

The following pages give

instructions on how to check proper

seat belt fit, what kind of booster

seat to use if one is needed, and

important precautions for a child

who must sit in the front seat.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism in order to remove a

child seat, unlatch the buckle,

unroute the seat belt, and let the belt

fully retract.

Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Allowing a larger child to sit

improperly in the front seat can

result in injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,

make sure the child moves the

seat as far back as possible

and wears the seat belt properly.

01/06/02 16:50:24 31S5A610_041

Devices intended to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

shoulder part of a seat belt, severely

compromise the protective capability

of the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they could

be very seriously injured in a crash.

However, if the belt touches or

crosses the child’s neck, the child

needs to use a booster seat.

This could result in

serious neck injuries during a crash.

This could cause

very serious injuries during a crash.

It also increases the chance that the

child will slide under the belt in a

crash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child

put on the seat belt. Follow the

instructions on page . Then check

how the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt rests

over the child’s collarbone and

against the center of the chest, as

shown, the child is large enough to

wear the seat belt.

CONTINUED

Do not put any accessories on a seat

belt.

Two children should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulder

part of a seat belt behind the back or

under the arm.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

01/06/02 16:50:35 31S5A610_042

The back seat is the safest place for

a child of any age or size.

In addition, the passenger’s front

airbag poses serious risks to children.

If the seat is too far forward, or the

child’s head is thrown forward

during a collision, or the child is

unrestrained or out of position, an

inflating front airbag can kill or

seriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. If

any part of a larger child’s body is in

the path of a deploying airbag, the

child could receive possibly serious

injuries.

A child may continue using a booster

seat until the tops of the ears are

even with the top of the seat-back. A

child of this height should be tall

enough to use the lap/shoulder belt

without a booster.

If a child needs a booster seat, we

recommend choosing a style that

allows the child to use the lap/

shoulder belt directly, without a

shield, as shown.

Whichever style you select, follow

the booster seat maker’s instructions.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport

Canada recommend that all children

ages 12 and under be properly

restrained in the back seat.

Using a Booster Seat When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:50:46 31S5A610_043

Of course, children vary widely. And

while age may be one indicator of

when a child can safely ride in the

front, there are other important

factors you should consider.

Check that the child’s seat belt is

properly positioned and secured.

Have the child sit up straight, back

against the seat, and feet on or

near the floor.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-

most position.

Carefully read the owner’s manual

and make sure you understand all

seat belt instructions and all safety

information.

If you decide that a child can safely

ride up front, be sure to:

Supervise the child. Even mature

children sometimes need to be

reminded to fasten the seat belts

or sit properly.

Physically, a child must be large

enough for the lap/shoulder belt to

properly fit over the hips, chest, and

shoulder (see pages and ). If

the seat belt does not fit properly,

the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child must

be able to follow the rules, including

sitting properly and wearing the seat

belt properly throughout a ride.

16 39

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Maturity

Physical Size

01/06/02 16:50:58 31S5A610_044

Your car has three tether anchorage

points under the rear window for

securing a tether-style child seat to

the car.

The tether anchorage points are

located under plastic covers. Pivot

the cover backward to access the

anchorage point.

Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchorage point as shown in

the illustration, then tighten the

strap according to the child seat

maker’s instructions. Make sure the

strap is not twisted.Since a tether can provide additional

security, we recommend using a

tether whenever one is required or

available. (Tethers are required in

Canada.)

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

CCOOVVEERR

AANNCCHHOORRAAGGEE PPOOIINNTT

01/06/02 16:51:07 31S5A610_045

Your car is equipped with LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat

bottom and are to be used only with

a child seat designed for use with

LATCH.

The exact location of each lower

anchor is marked with a small circle

above the lower anchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible child

seat:

Move the seat belt buckle or

center seat belt away from the

lower anchors.

Make sure there are no foreign

objects around the anchors.

Foreign objects could get in the

way of a secure connection

between the child seat and the

anchors.

Put the child seat in the rear left

or right vehicle seat and attach the

child seat to the lower anchors

according to the child seat maker’s

instructions.

CONTINUED

Using LATCH

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

RRiiggiidd ttyyppee

LLOOWWEERR AANNCCHHOORRSS

01/06/02 16:51:18 31S5A610_046

Follow the child seat maker’s

instructions for any additional

advice on adjusting or tightening

the fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchorage point and tighten

the strap according to the child

seat maker’s instructions. Make

sure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side to side to

verify that it is secure enough to

stay upright during normal driving

maneuvers.

4. 5.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

FFlleexxiibbllee ttyyppee

01/06/02 16:51:26 31S5A610_047

This seat belt has a single belt that

goes over your shoulder, across your

chest and across your hips. The seat belts in all seating positions

except the driver’s have an additional

locking mechanism that must be

activated to secure a child seat. (See

pages and for instructions on

how to secure child seats with this

type of seat belt.)

All seat belts have an emergency

locking retractor. In normal driving,

the retractor lets you move freely in

your seat while it keeps some

tension on the belt. During a collision

or sudden stop, the retractor

automatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

Guide the belt across your body to

the door pillar. After exiting the car,

be sure the belt is out of the way and

will not get closed in the door.

To unlock the belt, push the red

PRESSbuttononthebuckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch

plate into the buckle, then tug on the

belt to make sure the buckle is

latched.

The seat belt system also

includes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you and

your passengers to fasten your belts.

If the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened before the ignition is turned

ON (II), the light will come on and a

beeper will also sound. The beeper

will stop after a few seconds, but the

light will stay on until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened.

Your seat belt system includes lap/

shoulder belts in all five seating

positions. The front seat belts are

also equipped with automatic seat

belt tensioners.

32 36

CONTINUED

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:51:38 31S5A610_048

If the shoulder part of the belt is

pulled all the way out, the locking

mechanism will activate. The belt

will retract, but it will not allow the

passenger to move freely.

To deactivate the locking

mechanism, unlatch the buckle and

let the seat belt fully retract. To

refasten the belt, pull it out only as

far as needed.

See page for instructions on how

to wear the lap/shoulder belt

properly.

The tensioners are designed to

activate primarily in frontal collisions.

The tensioners are independent of

the airbag system, so they can be

activated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags to

deploy. In this case, the airbags

would not be needed but the

additional seat belt tension can be

helpful.

The tensioners will be activated in a

collision severe enough to cause the

front airbags to inflate.

For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automatic

seat belt tensioners. When activated,

the tensioners immediately tighten

the belts to help hold the driver and

a front passenger in place.

When the tensioners are activated,

the seat belts will remain tight until

they are unbuckled in the normal

way.

The SRS indicator light will

come on if there is a

problem with your automatic seat

belt tensioners (see page ).

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:51:49 31S5A610_049

For safety, you should check the

condition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look for

frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check

that the latches work smoothly and

that the lap/shoulder belts retract

easily. Any belt not in good condition

or not working properly will not

provide good protection and should

be replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warranty

on seat belts. Honda will repair or

replace any seat belt component that

fails to function properly during

normal use. Please see your

booklet for

details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

it must be replaced by the dealer. A

belt that has been worn during a

crash may not provide the same level

of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the

anchors for damage and replace

them if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners that

deployed during a crash must be

replaced.

For information on how to clean your

seat belts, see page .261

Honda

Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety

Not checking or maintaining

seat belts can result in serious

injury or death if the seat belts

do not work properly when

needed.

Check your seat belts regularly

and have any problem

corrected as soon as possible.

01/06/02 16:52:01 31S5A610_050

Your Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’s

airbag is stored in the center of

the steering wheel; the front

passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe

dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS

AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate to

severe frontal collision, the sensors

will detect the vehicle’s rapid

deceleration. If the rate of

deceleration is high enough, the

control unit will instantly inflate the

front airbags.

A sophisticated electronic system

that continually monitors and

records information about the

sensors, the control unit, the

airbag activators, and driver and

passenger seat belt use when the

ignition is ON (II).

Sensors that can detect a

moderate to severe frontal

collision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners

(see page ).

An indicator light on the

instrument panel that alerts you to

a possible problem with the

system (see page ).

Emergency backup power in case

your car’s electrical system is

disconnected in a crash.

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:52:14 31S5A610_051

This can occur when the severity of

a collision is at the margin, or

threshold, that determines whether

or not the airbags will deploy. In

such cases, the seat belt will provide

sufficient protection, and the

supplemental protection offered by

the airbag would be minimal.

Since both airbags use the same

sensors, both airbags normally

inflate at the same time. However, it

is possible for only one airbag to

inflate.

After inflating, the front airbags

immediately deflate, so they won’t

interfere with the driver’s visibility,

or the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat

belts help restrain your lower body

and torso. Your airbag provides a

cushion to help restrain and protect

your head and chest.

The total time for inflation and

deflation is approximately one-tenth

of a second, so fast that most

occupants are not aware that the

airbags deployed until they see them

lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see what

looks like smoke. This is actually

powder from the airbag’s surface.

Although the powder is not harmful,

people with respiratory problems

mayexperiencesometemporary

discomfort. If this occurs, get out of

the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:52:24 31S5A610_052

To get the best protection from the

side airbags, front seat occupants

should wear their seat belts and sit

upright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, the sensors will

detect rapid deceleration and signal

the control unit to instantly inflate

either the driver’s or the passenger’s

side airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during a

side impact. If the impact is on the

passenger’s side, the passenger’s

side airbag will deploy even if there

is no passenger.

Your car is equipped with side

airbags for the driver and a front

seat passenger. The airbags are

stored in the outer edges of the front

seat-backs, and both are marked

‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

U.S. Owners:

For additional information on how

your airbags work, see the booklet

titled

that came with your

owner’s manual.

Canadian Owners:

For additional information on how

your airbags work, ask your dealer

for a copy of the booklet titled

SRS: What You Need to Know

About Airbags

SRS:

What You Need to Know About Airbags

Only on U.S. models equipped with side

airbags.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How Your Side Airbags Work

01/06/02 16:52:36 31S5A610_053

If the light comes on at any other

time, or does not come on at all, you

should have the system checked by

your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does not

come on after you turn the ignition

ON (II).

If the light stays on after the

engine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes on

andoffwhileyoudrive.

The SRS indicator light

alerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags and

automatic seat belt tensioners.

On models with side airbags, this

light will also alert you to a potential

problem with your side airbags or

passenger’s side airbag automatic

cut-off system (see page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),

this indicator will light briefly then

go out. This tells you that the system

is working properly.

If you see any of these indications,

your front or side airbags may not

deploy, your passenger’s side airbag

automatic cut-off system may not

work properly, or your seat belt

tensioners may not work when you

need them. See your Honda dealer

as soon as possible.

How the SRS Indicator Light

Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Ignoring the SRS indicator light

can result in serious injury or

death if the airbags, cut-off

system, or tensioners do not

work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a

dealer as soon as possible if

the SRS light alerts you to a

potential problem.

01/06/02 16:52:48 31S5A610_054

A front seat passenger should not

use a cushion or other object as a

backrest. It may prevent the cut-off

system from working properly.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),

the indicator should light briefly and

goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’t

light, stays on, or comes on while

driving without a passenger in the

front seat, have the system checked.

If a small-statured adult leans

sideways, or larger adult slouches

and leans sideways into the

deployment path of the side airbag,

the system may also shut off the side

airbag.

If the side airbag cut-off indicator

light comes on, you should have the

passenger sit upright. Once the

passenger is out of the deployment

path of the side airbag, the system

will turn the airbag back on and the

light will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from an

inflating side airbag, your car has an

automatic cut-off system for the

passenger’s side airbag.

Although Honda does not encourage

children to ride in the front, this

system is designed to shut off the

side airbag if a child leans sideways

and the child’s head is in the side

airbag deployment path.

If does not mean there is a problem

with your side airbags. It means that

thesideairbagcut-offsystemhas

activated to prevent the side airbag

from deploying.

This light alerts you that

the passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off. 61

Only on U.S. models equipped with side

airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How the Side Airbag Cut-off

Indicator Light Works

01/06/02 16:52:58 31S5A610_055

Together, airbags and

seat belts provide the best

protection.

Tampering could cause

the airbags to deploy, possibly

causing very serious injury.

See page for further information

and precautions relating to your

airbags.

If rain or spilled water

soaks into a seat-back, it can

prevent the side airbag system

from working properly.

Improperly

replacing or covering front seat-

back covers can prevent your side

airbags from inflating during a

collision.

Your front and side airbag systems

(if equipped) are virtually

maintenance-free, and there are no

parts you can safely service.

However, you must have your car

serviced if:

Take your car to an

authorized Honda dealer as soon

as possible. If you ignore this

indication, the airbags might not

inflate when you need them.

Any

airbag that has deployed must be

replaced along with the control

unit, automatic seat belt

tensioners, and other related parts.

Do not try to remove or replace

anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust

be done by a Honda dealer or a

knowledgeable body shop.

172

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

Donotattempttodeactivateyour

airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag

components or wiring for any

reason.

Do not expose the front seat-backs

to water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-

back covers without consulting a

Honda dealer.

The SRS indicator light alerts you

to a problem.

Your airbags ever inflate.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

01/06/02 16:53:09 31S5A610_056

High levels of carbon monoxide can

collect rapidly in enclosed areas,

such as a garage. Do not run the

engine with the garage door closed.

Even with the door open, run the

engine only long enough to move the

vehicle out of the garage.

Your car’s exhaust contains carbon

monoxide gas. You should have no

problem with carbon monoxide

entering the car in normal driving if

you maintain your car properly.

Have the exhaust system inspected

for leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.

You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust.

Thecarwasinanaccidentthat

may have damaged the underside.

If you must sit in your parked car,

even in an unconfined area, with the

engine running, adjust the heating

and cooling system as follows:

With the trunk lid open, air flow can

pull exhaust gas into your car’s

interior and create a hazardous

condition. If you must drive with the

trunk lid open, open all the windows

and set the heating and cooling

system as shown below.

Select the Fresh Air mode.

Select the mode.

Turn the fan on high speed.

Set the temperature control to a

comfortable setting.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause

unconsciousness and even kill

you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or

activities that expose you to

carbon monoxide.

01/06/02 16:53:18 31S5A610_057

These labels are in the locations

shown. They warn you of potential

hazards that could cause serious

injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read, contact your Honda dealer

for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORDASHBOARD

01/06/02 16:53:38 31S5A610_058

On models without side airbags

On models with side airbags

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety

HOOD

01/06/02 16:53:47 31S5A610_059

This section gives information about

the controls and displays that

contribute to the daily operation of

your Honda. All the essential

controls are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58

...............................Indicator Lights . 59

.............................................Gauges . 66

...............................Speedometer . 66

.................................Tachometer . 66

...............Odometer/Trip Meter . 66

..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

...................Temperature Gauge . 68

Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 69

...................................Headlights . 70

............Daytime Running Lights . 71

....Instrument Panel Brightness . 71

................................Turn Signals . 72

.....................Windshield Wipers . 72

..................Windshield Washers . 74

..........................Hazard Warning . 74

.............Rear Window Defogger . 75

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 76

...............................Keys and Locks . 77

..............................................Keys . 77

....................Immobilizer System . 78

............................Ignition Switch . 80

..................................Door Locks . 81

......................Power Door Locks . 82

...................Remote Transmitter . 83

..............Childproof Door Locks . 86

...........................................Trunk . 86

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 87

............................Seat Adjustments . 88

.............Front Seat Adjustments . 88

Driver’s Seat Height

..............................Adjustment . 89

................Driver’s Seat Armrest . 89

..........................Head Restraints . 90

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 91

..............................Power Windows . 93

.........................................Moonroof . 95

.............................................Mirrors . 96

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 96

.................................Parking Brake . 97

........................................Glove Box . 98

.............................Beverage Holder . 99

.................Console Compartment . 100

........................................Coin Box . 101

...............................Center Pocket . 101

.............Accessory Power Socket . 101

...............................Interior Lights . 102

..............................Ceiling Light . 102

...................................Spotlights . 103

..........................Courtesy Light . 103

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:53:53 31S5A610_060

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls

AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM

DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

HHEEAATTIINNGG//CCOOOOLLIINNGG CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE

((PP.. 110066))

((PP.. 111144,, 112266,, 113388))

((PP.. 111199,, 113311,, 114433))

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

MMIIRRRROORR

CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK

SSWWIITTCCHH

PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

((PP.. 9966))

((PP.. 9955))

((PP.. 8822))

((PP.. 115599))

((PP.. 9933))

((PP.. 116655))

((PP.. 8866))

((PP.. 116666))

((PP.. 116600))

01/06/02 16:54:00 31S5A610_061

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

CONTINUED

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

EX and LX

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6644))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6644))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT

RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 228811))

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG CCUUTT--OOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6622,, 227799))

((PP.. 6622,, 228800))

01/06/02 16:54:07 31S5A610_062

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTRRUUNNKK--OOPPEENN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

LLOOWW FFUUEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6622))

((PP.. 6644))

((PP.. 6633))

((PP.. 6611))

((PP.. 6644))

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEAATT BBEELLTT

RREEMMIINNDDEERR LLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR SSYYSSTTEEMM

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 228811))

SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG CCUUTT--OOFFFF IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

((PP.. 6622,, 227799))

((PP.. 6622,, 228800))

01/06/02 16:54:15 31S5A610_063

The instrument panel has many

indicators to give you important

information about your car.

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). It is a

reminder to you and your passengers

to protect yourselves by fastening

the seat belts. A beeper also sounds

if you have not fastened your seat

belt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,

the beeper will stop after a few

seconds but the light stays on until

you do. Both the light and the beeper

stay off if you fasten your seat belt

before turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). If it

comes on at any other time, it

indicates that the passenger’s side

airbag has automatically shut off.

For complete information, see page

This indicator lights when you turn

the ignition switch ON (II). If it

comes on at any other time, it

indicates a potential problem with

your front airbags or automatic seat

belt tensioners. On models equipped

with side airbags, this light will also

alert you to a potential problem with

your side airbags or passenger’s side

airbag automatic cut-off system. For

complete information, see page .51

CONTINUED

Only on U.S. models equipped with side

airbags

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Supplemental Restraint

System Indicator

Side Airbag Cut-off

Indicator

01/06/02 16:54:27 31S5A610_064

This light has two functions:

This light normally comes on for a

few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II), and when

the ignition switch is turned to

START (III). If this light comes on at

any other time, there is a problem in

theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe

cartoyourdealertohaveitchecked.

With the light on, your car still has

normal braking ability but no anti-

lock. For complete information, see

page .

If this light comes on when the

engine is running, the battery is not

being charged. For complete

information, see page .

The engine can be severely damaged

if this light flashes or stays on when

the engine is running. For complete

information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch ON (II). It

is a reminder to check the parking

brake. Driving with the parking

brake not fully released can

damage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit after

you have fully released the

parking brake while the engine is

running, or if it comes on while

driving, it can indicate a problem

in the brake system. For complete

information, see page .

280

279

283

191

Only on models equipped with ABS (see

page )189

Parking Brake

and Brake

System

Indicator

Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS)

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

U.S. Canada

01/06/02 16:54:39 31S5A610_065

This light comes on with the high

beam headlights. See page for

information on the headlight

controls.

This lights when you set the cruise

control. See page for information

on operating the cruise control.

On Canadian models, this indicator

comes on with reduced brightness

when the Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) are on (see page ).

See page .

The left or right turn signal light

blinks when you signal a lane change

or turn. If the light does not blink or

blinks rapidly, it usually means one

of the turn signal bulbs is burned out

(see page ). Replace the bulb as

soon as possible, since other drivers

cannot see that you are signalling.

This light comes on if the trunk lid is

not closed tightly.

This light comes on as a reminder

that you must refuel soon.

WhenyouturnontheHazard

Warning switch, both turn signal

lights blink. All turn signals on the

outside of the car should flash.

This light comes on when the

washer fluid level is low. Add washer

fluid when you see this light come on

(see page ).

281

248

159

219

Only on models equipped with Cruise

Control System

Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:54:58 31S5A610_066

This indicator comes on for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition

switch ON (II). It will then go off if

you have inserted a properly-coded

ignition key. If it is not a properly-

coded key, the indicator will blink

and the engine will not start (see

page ).

This indicator also blinks several

times when you turn the ignition

switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY

(I) or LOCK (0).

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)

and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) this

indicator will light for two seconds

when you first turn the ignition

switch ON (II), and then flash for

ten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000

km) without having the scheduled

maintenance performed, this

indicator will remain on as a constant

reminder.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules

for Normal and Severe Driving

Conditions on pages .

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)

after the Maintenance Required

Indicator is reset, it will come on for

two seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II).

198 204

Indicator Lights

Immobilizer System

Indicator

Maintenance Required

Indicator

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:55:08 31S5A610_067

Your dealer will reset this indicator

after completing the scheduled

maintenance. If this maintenance is

done by someone other than your

Honda dealer, reset the indicator as

follows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/reset

button in the instrument panel,

then turn the ignition switch ON

(II).

Hold the button until the indicator

resets (approximately ten

seconds).

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:55:16 31S5A610_068

This shows your speed in miles per

hour (mph). The smaller inner

numbers are the speed in kilometers

per hour (km/h).

The tachometer shows the engine

speed in revolutions per minute

(rpm). To protect the engine from

damage, never drive with the

tachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-

tance your car has been driven. It

measures miles in U.S. models and

kilometers in Canadian models.

It is illegal under U.S. federal law and

Canadian provincial regulations to

disconnect, reset, or alter the

odometer with the intent to change

the number of miles or kilometers

indicated.

This shows your speed in kilometers

per hour (km/h). The smaller inner

numbers are the speed in miles per

hour (mph).

The trip meter shows the number of

miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)

driven since you last reset it.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

On LX and EX models

Speedometer

Tachometer

Odometer/Trip Meter

EX and LX

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNOODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

01/06/02 16:55:30 31S5A610_069

This shows how much fuel you have.

It is most accurate when the car is on

level ground. It may show slightly

more or less than the actual amount

whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor

hilly roads.

There are two trip meters: Trip A

and Trip B. The odometer and the

two trip meters use the same display.

Switch between these displays and

the odometer by pressing the Select/

Reset button repeatedly. Each trip

meter works independently, so you

can keep track of two different

distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and

then press and hold the Select/Reset

button until the number resets to

‘‘0.0’’.

The needle returns to the bottom

after you turn off the ignition. The

gauge shows the fuel level reading

immediately after you turn the

ignition switch back ON (II).

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Fuel Gauge

FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE GGAAUUGGEE

OODDOOMMEETTEERR//TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR

SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR

SSEELLEECCTT//RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

Please ref uel early, as driving to the

last drop of fuel can result in damage

to the engine and/or three way catalytic

converter.

01/06/02 16:55:40 31S5A610_070

This shows the temperature of the

engine’s coolant. During normal

operation, the pointer should rise

from the bottom white mark to about

the middle of the gauge. In severe

driving conditions, such as very hot

weather or a long period of uphill

driving, the pointer may rise to the

upper zone. If it reaches the red

(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of

the road. Turn to page for

instructions and precautions on

checking the engine’s cooling

system.

276

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Temperature Gauge

01/06/02 16:55:45 31S5A610_071

Thetwoleversonthesteering

column contain controls for driving

features you use most often. The left

lever controls the turn signals,

headlights, and high beams. The

right lever controls the windshield

washers and wipers.

The hazard warning lights switch is

on the dashboard between the

center air vents.

To use the horn, press the center

pad of the steering wheel.

The tilt adjustment lever on the

underside of the steering column

allows you to tilt the steering wheel.

The controls under the left air vent

are for the moonroof, mirrors and

cruise control.

The rear window defogger switch is

on the heating and cooling control

panel.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG

LLIIGGHHTTSS

MMOOOONNRROOOOFF

TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD

WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS

MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

SSWWIITTCCHHEESS

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

MMAASSTTEERR

SSWWIITTCCHH

HHOORRNN

01/06/02 16:55:56 31S5A610_072

The rotating switch on the left lever

controls the lights. Turning this

switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns

on the parking lights, taillights,

instrument panel lights, side-marker

lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’

position turns on the headlights.

To change from low beams to high

beams, push the turn signal lever

forward until you hear a click. The

blue high beam indicator will light

(see page ). To return to low

beams, pull the turn signal lever

back.

If you leave the lights on with the

ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)

or LOCK (0), you will hear a

reminder tone when you open the

driver’s door.

To flash the high beams, pull the

turn signal lever back lightly, then

release it. The high beams will come

on and go off. The high beams will

stay on for as long as you hold the

lever back, no matter what position

the headlight switch is in.

Headlights

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:56:06 31S5A610_073

Canadian models only

With the headlight switch off, the

high beam headlights come on with

reduced brightness when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (II) and

release the parking brake. They

remain on until you turn the ignition

off, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal

operation when you turn them on

with the switch.

Turntheknobontheleftsideofthe

instrument panel to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel

lights.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:56:15 31S5A610_074

Signal a turn or lane change with this

lever. Push down on the lever to

signal a left turn, and up to signal a

right turn. If you push it up or down

all the way, the turn signal continues

to blink even when you release the

lever. It shuts off automatically as

you complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightly

on the turn signal lever in the proper

direction and hold it. The lever will

return to the center position as soon

as you release it.

This lever controls the windshield

wipers and washers. It has five

positions:

MIST: mist

OFF: off

INT: intermittent

LO: low speed

HI: high speed

To select a position, push the lever

up or down.

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR

01/06/02 16:56:25 31S5A610_075

In intermittent, the wipers operate

every few seconds. In low speed and

high speed, the wipers run continu-

ously.

In intermittent, you can vary how

often the wipers sweep the

windshield by turning the INT TIME

ring on the right lever. In low speed

and high speed, the wipers run

continuously.

To operate the wipers in mist mode,

push the control lever up from the

OFF position. The wipers run at high

speed until you release the lever.

This gives you a quick way to clear

the windshield.

On EX model in the U.S., and LX

model in Canada

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

IINNTT TTIIMMEE RRIINNGG

01/06/02 16:56:33 31S5A610_076

To clean the windshield, pull back on

the wiper control lever. The washers

spray until you release the lever.

Push the button between the center

vents to turn on the hazard warning

lights (four-way flashers). This

causes all four outside turn signals

and both indicators in the instrument

panel to flash. Use the hazard

warning lights if you need to park in

a dangerous area near heavy traffic,

or if your car is disabled.

The wipers run at low speed while

you’re pulling the lever, then

complete one more sweep of the

windshield after you release it.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Washers Hazard Warning

01/06/02 16:56:42 31S5A610_077

The rear window defogger will clear

fog,frost,andthinicefromthe

window. Push the defogger button to

turn it on and off. The light in the

button lights to show the defogger is

on. If you do not turn it off, the

defogger will shut itself off after

about15minutes.Italsoshutsoff

when you turn off the ignition. You

have to turn it on again when you

restart the car.

Make sure the rear window is clear

and you have good visibility before

starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be

accidentally damaged. When

cleaning the glass, always wipe side

to side.

Rear Window Defogger

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:56:49 31S5A610_078

Push the lever up to lock the

steering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place

by trying to move it up and down.

Move the steering wheel to the

desired position, making sure the

wheel points toward your chest,

not toward your face. Make sure

you can see the instrument panel

gauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever under the steering

column all the way down.

To adjust the steering wheel upward

or downward:

Make any steering wheel adjustment

before you start driving.

See page for important safety

information about how to properly

position the steering wheel.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the steering wheel

position while driving may

cause you to lose control of the

car and be seriously injured in a

crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only

when the car is stopped.

01/06/02 16:57:00 31S5A610_079

CONTINUED

Your car comes with two master

keys and a valet key.

The master key fits all the locks on

your car:

• Ignition

• Doors

• Trunk

• Trunk release handle

• Rear seat trunk access

The valet key works only in the

ignition and the door locks. You can

keep the trunk, trunk release handle

and rear seat trunk access locked

when you leave your car and the

valet key at a parking facility. (See

Trunk, page .)

Youshouldhavereceivedakey

number plate with your set of keys.

You will need this key number if you

ever have to get a lost key replaced.

Keep the plate stored in a safe place.

When replacing keys, use only

Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electronic

circuits that are activated by the

Immobilizer System. They will not

work to start the engine if the

circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and

high humidity.

The keys do not contain batteries.

Do not try to take them apart.

Keep the keys away from liquids.

If they get wet, dry them immedi-

ately with a soft cloth.

Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy

objects on them.

Instruments and Controls

Keys

Keys and Locks

KKEEYY

NNUUMMBBEERR

PPLLAATTEE

MMAASSTTEERR

KKEEYYSS

((BBllaacckk))

VVAALLEETT

KKEEYY

((GGrraayy))

01/06/02 16:57:15 31S5A610_080

Some models also come with two

remote transmitters; see page for

an explanation of their operation.

The Immobilizer System protects

your car from theft. A properly-

coded master or valet key must be

used in the ignition switch for the

engine to start. If an improperly-

coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch to

ON (II), the Immobilizer System

indicator should come on for a few

seconds, then go out. If the indicator

starts to blink, it means the system

does not recognize the coding of the

key. Turn the ignition switch to

LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert

it, and turn the switch to ON (II)

again.

The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object is near the

ignition switch when you insert the

key. To make sure the system

recognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizer

keys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,

not metal.

Keep other keys away from your

car’s key and the ignition switch

while trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognize the coding of your key,

contact your Honda dealer.

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Remote Transmitter

Immobilizer System

01/06/02 16:57:25 31S5A610_081

This indicator will also blink several

times when you turn the ignition

switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY

(I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this system

or add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and you

cannot start the engine, contact your

Honda dealer.

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:57:33 31S5A610_082

You can insert or

remove the key only in this position.

To switch from ACCESSORY to

LOCK, you must push the key in

slightly as you turn it. If your car has

an automatic transmission, the shift

lever must also be in Park. The anti-

theft lock will lock the steering

column when you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, the

anti-theft lock may sometimes make

it difficult to turn the key from

LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn

the steering wheel to the left or to

the right as you turn the key.

The ignition switch is on the right

side of the steering column. It has

four positions:

•LOCK(0)

• ACCESSORY (I)

• ON (II)

• START (III)

Instruments and Controls

Keys and Locks

LOCK (0)Ignition Switch

Removing the key from the

ignition switch while driving

locks the steering. This can

cause you to lose control.

Remove the key from the

ignition switch only when

parked.

01/06/02 16:57:41 31S5A610_083

In this position,

you can operate the audio system

and the accessory power socket.

This is the normal key

position when driving. All features

and accessories on the car are usable.

Several of the lights on the instru-

ment panel come on as a test when

you turn the ignition switch from

ACCESSORY to ON.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.

Push the tab down to lock the door

and pull it up to unlock.

To lock any passenger’s door when

getting out of the car, push the lock

tab down and close the door. To lock

the driver’s door, pull the outside

door handle and push the lock tab

down. Release the handle, then close

the door.

Use this position

only to start the engine. The switch

returns to ON (II) when you let go of

the key.

The engine will not start if the

Immobilizer System does not

recognize the key’s coding (see page

You will hear a reminder beeper if

you leave the key in the ignition

switch in the LOCK (0) or

ACCESSORY (I) position and open

thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto

turn off the beeper.

CONTINUED

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

Door LocksSTART (III)

01/06/02 16:57:53 31S5A610_084

The master door lock switch allows

control of all door locks from the

driver’s door. Push the switch down

to lock all doors, and up to unlock

them.

The front doors can be locked and

unlocked from the outside with the

key.

All doors lock when you push down

the lock tab on the driver’s door, or

lock the driver’s door from the

outside with the key. Only the driver’s

door unlocks when you use the key

or lock tab. To unlock the passen-

gers’ doors, use the master door lock

switch or the lock tab on each door.

Standard on LX and EX models in the

U.S., and LX model in Canada

Optional on DX model in Canada

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Power Door Locks

MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH

01/06/02 16:58:02 31S5A610_085

CONTINUED

You can lock and unlock your car

with the remote transmitter. When

you push the LOCK button, all doors

lock. The parking lights, side marker

lights, and taillights flash once.

When you push the LOCK button a

second time within 5 seconds after

you have locked the doors, the horn

will sound once to verify that the

doors are locked.

When you push the UNLOCK button

once, only the driver’s door unlocks.

The remaining doors unlock when

you push the button a second time.

The parking lights, side marker

lights, and taillights flash twice.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling light

switch is in the center position) will

come on when you press the

UNLOCK button. If you do not open

any of the doors, the light will go out

in about 30 seconds and the doors

will automatically relock. If you

relock the doors with the remote

transmitter before 30 seconds have

elapsed, the light will go off

immediately.

You cannot lock or unlock the doors

with the remote transmitter if any

door is not fully closed or the key is

in the ignition switch.

Standard on EX model in the U.S., and

LX and DX-GOP models in Canada

Optional on LX model in the U.S.

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

LLEEDD

UUNNLLOOCCKK

BBUUTTTTOONN

LLOOCCKK

BBUUTTTTOONN

PPAANNIICC

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 16:58:12 31S5A610_086

To replace the battery, remove the

round cover on the back of the trans-

mitter by turning it counterclockwise

with a coin.

Remove the old battery and note the

polarity. Make sure the polarity of

the new battery is the same ( side

facing up), then insert it in the

transmitter.

When the remote transmitter’s

battery begins to get weak, it may

take several pushes on the button to

lock or unlock the doors, and the

LED will get dim. Replace the

battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

To cancel Panic mode before 30

seconds, press any button on the

remote transmitter. You can also

turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if the

ignition switch is in the ON (II)

position.

Panic mode allows you to remotely

activate your car’s horn and exterior

lights to attract attention. When

activated, the horn will sound, and

the exterior lights will flash, for

about 30 seconds. To activate panic

mode,pressandholdthePANIC

button for about one second.

Instruments and Controls

Keys and Locks

Replacing the BatteryPanic Mode

OOppeenn

CClloossee

RROOUUNNDD

CCOOVVEERR

CCUUSSHHIIOONN

RRIINNGG

BBAATTTTEERRYY

01/06/02 16:58:24 31S5A610_087

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-

mitter, such as dropping or throwing

it. Also, protect it from extreme hot

or cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with a

soft cloth. Do not use strong

cleaners or solvents that could harm

the case. Immersing the transmitter

in any liquid will harm the trans-

mitter and cause it to not function

properly.

If you lose a transmitter, you will

need to have the replacement

programmed to your car’s system by

your Honda dealer. Any other

transmitters you have will also need

to be reprogrammed.

Reinstall the cushion ring. Align the

mark on the cover with the

mark on the transmitter,

thensetthecoverinplaceandturnit

clockwise.

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Transmitter Care

01/06/02 16:58:35 31S5A610_088

To close the trunk, press down on

the trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading and

weight limit information. Keep the

trunk lid closed at all times while

driving to avoid damaging the lid,

and to prevent exhaust gas from

getting into the interior. See

on page .

Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:

Pull the trunk release handle to

the left of the driver’s seat.

Usethemasterkeytoopenthe

trunk lock. The valet key does not

work in this lock.

The childproof door locks are

designed to prevent children seated

in the rear from accidentally opening

the rear doors. Each rear door has a

lock lever near the edge. With the

lever in the LOCK position, the door

cannot be opened from the inside

regardless of the position of the lock

tab. To open the door, pull the lock

tab up and use the outside door

handle.

173

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Trunk

Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Childproof Door Locks

TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE

MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

LLEEVVEERR

PPuullll

01/06/02 16:58:47 31S5A610_089

To protect items in the trunk when

you need to give the key to someone

else, lock the trunk release handle

with the master key and give the

other person the valet key.

As a safety feature, your car has a

release lever on the trunk latch so

the trunk can be opened from the

inside.

Parents should decide if their

children should be shown how to use

this feature.

For more information about child

safety, see page .

To open the trunk, push the release

lever to the left.

U.S. models only

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Emergency Trunk Opener

MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

01/06/02 16:58:57 31S5A610_090

See pages for important safety

information and warnings about how to

properly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.

To change the angle of the seat-back,

pull up on the lever on the outside of

the seat bottom. Move the seat-back

to the desired position and release

the lever. Let the seat-back latch in

the new position.

To adjust the seat forward and

backward, pull up on the bar under

the seat cushion’s front edge. Move

the seat to the desired position and

releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat

to make sure it is locked in position.

FrontSeatAdjustments

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:59:07 31S5A610_091

To adjust the height of the driver’s

seat, turn the dial on the outside of

the seat bottom.

To use the driver’s seat armrest,

pivotitdown.

On EX model in the U.S., and LX model

in Canada

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and

LX model in Canada

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Seat Armrest

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

01/06/02 16:59:15 31S5A610_092

To remove a head restraint for

cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as

it will go. Push the release button

and pull the restraint out of the seat-

back.

The front head restraints adjust for

height. You need both hands to

adjust the restraint. Do not attempt

to adjust it while driving. To raise it,

pull upward. To lower the restraint,

push the release button sideways

and push the restraint down.

The front head restraints help

protect you and your passenger from

whiplash and other injuries. They are

most effective when you adjust them

so the back of the occupant’s head

rests against the center of the

restraint. A taller person should

adjust the restraint as high as

possible.

See page for important safety

information and a warning about how to

properly position the head restraints.

Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 16:59:23 31S5A610_093

The back of the rear seat folds down

to give you direct access to the trunk.

Each side folds down separately.

With only half the seat folded, you

can still carry a passenger in the

back seat. The seat-back can be

released from inside the car or inside

the trunk.

When storing cargo, you can move

therearcentershoulderbeltoutof

the way by removing the belt from

the guide.

To fold down either side of the seat-

back from inside the car, insert the

master key in the lock on the rear

shelf. To fold down the driver’s side,

turn the key clockwise, pull down the

top of the seat-back, then release the

key. To fold down the passenger’s

side, turn the key counterclockwise

and perform the same procedure.

CONTINUED

Folding Rear Seat

Instruments and Controls

MMAASSTTEERR KKEEYY

01/06/02 16:59:32 31S5A610_094

To release the seat-back from inside

the trunk, pull the release under the

trunk panel. Push the seat-back

down, then let go of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it

firmly against the trunk panel. Make

sure it is latched in place by pulling

on the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts are

positioned in front of the rear seat-

back whenever the seat-back is in its

upright position.

Do not put any heavy items on the

seat-back when it is folded.

Make sure all items in the trunk, or

items extending through the opening

into the back seat, are secured.

Looseitemscanflyforwardand

cause injury if you have to brake

hard. See on page

Never drive with the seat-back

folded down and the trunk lid open.

See on

page .54

173

Folding Rear Seat

Instruments and Controls

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

RREELLEEAASSEE

01/06/02 16:59:41 31S5A610_095

CONTINUED

Your car’s windows are electrically-

powered. Turn the ignition switch to

ON(II)toraiseorloweranywindow.

Each door has a switch that controls

its window. To open the window,

push the switch down and hold it.

Release the switch when you want

the window to stop. Close the

window by pulling back on the

switch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has a

master power window control panel.

To open any of the passengers’ win-

dows, push down on the appropriate

switch and hold it until the window

reaches the desired position. To

close the window, pull back on the

window switch. Release the switch

when the window gets to the position

you want.

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and

LX model in Canada

Instruments and Controls

Power Windows

DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH

MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH

Closing a power window on

someone’s hands or fingers can

cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before

closing them.

01/06/02 16:59:50 31S5A610_096

The master control panel also con-

tains these extra features:

To open the driver’s

window fully, push the window

switch firmly down and release it.

The window automatically goes all

the way down. To stop the window

from going all the way down, pull

back on the window switch briefly.

To open the driver’s window only

partially, push the window switch

down lightly and hold it. The window

will stop as soon as you release the

switch.

The AUTO function only works to

lower the driver’s window. To raise

the window, you must pull back on

the window switch and hold it until

the window reaches the desired

position.

The light inside the AUTO switch

comes on when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (II).

The MAIN switch controls power to

the passengers’ windows. When you

push in the MAIN switch, the

passengers’ windows cannot be

raised or lowered. The MAIN switch

does not affect the driver’s window.

To cancel this feature, push on the

switch again to get it to pop out.

Keep the MAIN switch pushed in

whenyouhavechildreninthecarso

they do not injure themselves by

operating the windows

unintentionally.

AUTO

Instruments and Controls

Power Windows

01/06/02 16:59:57 31S5A610_097

The moonroof has two positions: it

can be tilted up in the back for

ventilation, or it can be slid back into

the roof. Use the switch under the

left dashboard vent to operate the

moonroof. The ignition switch must

be ON (II).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,

press and hold the center button

( ). To close the moonroof,

press and hold the top of the switch

( ). To open the moonroof,

press and hold the bottom of the

switch ( ). Release the switch

when the moonroof gets to the

desired position. Make sure

everyone’s hands are away from the

moonroof before opening or closing

it.

OntheU.S.EXmodel

Instruments and Controls

Moonroof

Opening or closing the

moonroof on someone’s hands

or fingers can cause serious

injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers

are clear of the moonroof

before opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof in

below-f reezing temperatures, or when

it is covered with snow or ice, you can

damage the moonroof panel or motor.

01/06/02 17:00:05 31S5A610_098

Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to move the

mirrorright,left,up,ordown.

When you finish, move the

selector switch to the center (off)

position. This turns off the

adjustment switch so you can’t

move a mirror out of position by

accidentally bumping the switch.

Adjust the outside mirrors with the

adjustment switch on the left side of

the dashboard:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L

(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s

side).

Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before

you start driving.

The inside mirror has day and night

positions. The night position reduces

glare from headlights behind you.

Flip the tab on the bottom edge of

the mirror to select the day or night

position.

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and

LX model in Canada

Instruments and Controls

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH

TTAABB

AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH

01/06/02 17:00:18 31S5A610_099

To apply the parking brake, pull the

lever up fully. To release it, pull up

slightly, push the button, and lower

the lever. The parking brake light on

the instrument panel should go out

when the parking brake is fully

released (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to re-

move fog and frost. With the ignition

switchON(II),turnontheheaters

by pressing the button. The light in

the button comes on as a reminder.

Press the button again to turn the

heaters off.

On Canadian LX model

Instruments and Controls

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Parking Brake

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE LLEEVVEERR

Driving the car with the parking brake

applied can damage the rear brakes

and axles.

01/06/02 17:00:27 31S5A610_100

Open the glove box by squeezing the

handle. Close it with a firm push.

Instruments and Controls

Glove Box

An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger

inacrash,evenifthe

passenger is wearing the seat

belt.

Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.

01/06/02 17:00:33 31S5A610_101

To open the beverage holder, push

on the top. The beverage

holder lid is spring-loaded and will

swing open. To close it, push it down

until it latches.

The lidless beverage holder is

locatedatthefrontofthecenter

console.

Be careful when you are using the

beverage holder. A spilled liquid that

is very hot can scald you or your

passengers. Spilled liquids can also

damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the

interior.

CONTINUED

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.

On DX model in the U.S., and DX

and LX models in Canada

Beverage Holder

Instruments and Controls

PPuusshh

01/06/02 17:00:41 31S5A610_102

A beverage holder for rear seat

passengers is in the back of the

console. To use it, pivot the lid down.

Squeeze the handle and slide the

console compartment lid backward

to access the compartment.

On EX model in the U.S.

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and

LX model in Canada

Console Compartment

Instruments and Controls

Beverage Holder, Console Compartment

100

HHAANNDDLLEE

01/06/02 17:00:50 31S5A610_103

The coin box is located under the air

vent. To open the coin box, pull the

bottom edge. Close it with a firm

push.

It will not power an automotive type

cigarette lighter element.

The center pocket is located under

the audio system. To open the lid,

pull it down. Close it with a firm push.

To use the accessory power socket,

pull up the cover.

This socket is intended to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories

that are rated 120 watts or less (10

amps). To power an accessory, the

ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.and

LX model in Canada

CoinBox CenterPocket AccessoryPowerSocket

Coin Box, Center Pocket, Accessory Power Socket

Instruments and Controls

101

01/06/02 17:01:00 31S5A610_104

The ceiling light has a three-position

switch. In the OFF position, the light

does not come on. In the center

position, the ceiling light comes on

when you open any door. In the ON

position, the ceiling light stays on

continuously.

The ceiling light (with the switch in

the center position) comes on when

you remove the key from the ignition

switch. If you do not open a door, the

light stays on, then fades out in

about 10 seconds.

Your car also has a front ceiling light

between the sun visors.

The ceiling light (with the switch in

the center position) also comes on

when you unlock the door with the

key or the remote transmitter (see

page ).83

On EX model in the U.S.

Ceiling Light

Interior Lights

Instruments and Controls

102

EEXX

FFRROONNTT

01/06/02 17:01:10 31S5A610_105

Your car also has a courtesy light in

the ignition switch. This light comes

on when you open the driver’s door.

It remains on for several seconds

after the door is closed.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing the

lens. Push the lens again to turn it

off. You can use the spotlights at all

times.

The front ceiling light contains two

spotlights as well as a main light.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing the

button next to each light. Push the

button again to turn it off. You can

use the spotlights at all times.

On EX model in the U.S. On LX model in the U.S. and Canada On EX model in the U.S.

Spotlights Courtesy Light

Interior Lights

Instruments and Controls

103

EEXX LLXX

01/06/02 17:01:20 31S5A610_106

104

01/06/02 17:01:23 31S5A610_107

The heating and air conditioning

systems in your Honda provide a

comfortable driving environment in

all weather conditions.

The standard audio system has

many features. This section de-

scribes those features and how to

use them. (If you selected an

optional audio system, refer to the

operating instructions that came

with it.)

.....................Heating and Cooling . 106

.........What Each Control Does . 106

............How to Use the System . 108

..........To Turn Everything Off . 113

Audio System (U.S. and

........................Canadian DX) . 114

.................Operating the Radio . 114

.................Adjusting the Sound . 118

............Audio System Lighting . 119

..............................Digital Clock . 119

Operating the Optional Cassette

.....................................Player . 120

............Tape Search Functions . 121

Operating the Optional

.............CD Player/Changer . 123

...............Audio System (U.S. LX) . 126

.................Operating the Radio . 126

.................Adjusting the Sound . 130

............Audio System Lighting . 131

..............................Digital Clock . 131

Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 132

............Tape Search Functions . 133

Operating the Optional

.............CD Player/Changer . 135

Audio System (U.S. EX and

.....Canadian LX and DX-GOP) . 138

.................Operating the Radio . 138

.................Adjusting the Sound . 142

............Audio System Lighting . 143

..............................Digital Clock . 143

....................Radio Frequencies . 144

........................Radio Reception . 145

.........Operating the CD Player . 147

.....Operating the CD Changer . 149

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 150

....CD Player Error Indications . 151

CD Changer Error

.............................Indications . 152

Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 153

............Tape Search Functions . 154

Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 156

............................Theft Protection . 157

...............................Cruise Control . 159

Your Honda has an anti-theft audio

system that requires a code number

to enable it.

Air conditioning is standard on LX

andEXmodelsintheU.S.,andLX

and DX-GOP models in Canada. It is

optional on other models.

On the U.S. EX model, and Canadian LX

and DX-GOP models

Comfort and Convenience Features

105

01/06/02 17:01:31 31S5A610_108

Proper use of the Heating and

Cooling system can make the

interior dry and comfortable, and

keep the windows clear for best

visibility.

If your car does not have air

conditioning, it can be installed at

any time. Your dealer can install a

genuine Honda air conditioning

system that meets Honda’s high

quality standards and is designed to

exactly fit your car. Please contact

your dealer for more information.

Turning this dial clockwise increases

the fan’s speed, which increases air

flow.

This button controls the source of

the air going into the system. When

the indicator in this button is lit, air

from the car’s interior is sent

through the system again (Recircula-

tion mode). When the indicator is off,

air is brought in from outside the car

(Fresh Air mode).

Turning this dial clockwise increases

the temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the air condi-

tioning ON and OFF. The indicator

in the button lights when the A/C is

on.

This button turns the rear window

defogger on and off (see page ).75

Standard for LX and EX models in

the U.S., and DX-GOP and LX models in

Canada

Optional for other models

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

Recirculation Button

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

106

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

01/06/02 17:01:46 31S5A610_109

Air flows from the floor

vents.

Air flow is divided between

the vents in the dashboard and the

floor vents.

Air flows from the center

and corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the MODE control dial to select

the vents the air flows from. Some

air will flow from the dashboard

vents in all modes.

When you select or ,

the system automatically switches to

Fresh Air mode and turns on the

A/C.

Air flows from the defroster

vents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the system

automatically switches to Fresh Air

mode.

Air flow is divided between

the floor vents and the defroster

vents at the base of the windshield.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

Mode Control Dial

107

01/06/02 17:01:57 31S5A610_110

This section covers how to set up the

system controls for ventilation,

heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and

defrosting.

The engine must be running for the

heater and air conditioning to

generate hot and cold air. The heater

uses engine coolant to warm the air.

If the engine is cold, it will be several

minutes before you feel warm air

coming from the system.

The air conditioning does not rely on

engine temperature.

The vents in the corners of the

dashboard can be opened and closed

with the dials underneath them.

The direction of air flow from the

vents in the center and each side of

the dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from each vent,

move the vent up-and-down and

move the tab side-to-side.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

Vent Controls How to Use the System

108

SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT

OOppeenn

CClloossee

TTAABB

CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTTSS

01/06/02 17:02:09 31S5A610_111

The outside air intakes for the

heating and cooling system are at

the base of the windshield. Keep

these clear of leaves and other

debris.

The flow-through ventilation system

draws in outside air, circulates it

through the interior, then exhausts it

through vents near the rear window.

It is best to leave the system in Fresh

Air mode under almost all conditions.

Keeping the system in Recirculation

mode, particularly with the A/C off,

can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to Recirculation mode when

you are driving through smoky or

dusty conditions, then switch back to

Fresh Air mode when the condition

clears.

Turn the temperature control dial

all the way to the left.

Make sure the A/C is off.

Select and Fresh Air mode.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

Ventilation

109

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:02:18 31S5A610_112

When the interior has cooled down

to a more comfortable temperature,

close the windows and set the

controls as described for normal

cooling.

Air conditioning places an extra load

on the engine. Watch the engine

coolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-go

traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.

If it moves near the red zone, turn

off the A/C until the gauge reads

normally.

If the interior is very warm from

beingparkedinthesun,youcancool

it down more rapidly by setting up

the controls this way:

Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. The light in the button

comesonwhenafanspeedis

selected.

Make sure the temperature

control dial is all the way to the left.

Select .

If the outside air is humid, select

Recirculation mode. If the outside

air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

Start the engine.

Turn on the A/C by pressing the

button. Make sure the tempera-

ture control dial is turned all the

way to the left.

Set the fan to maximum speed.

Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

110

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG

BBUUTTTTOONN

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:02:28 31S5A610_113

To warm the interior:

Air conditioning, as it cools, removes

moisture from the air. When used in

combination with the heater, it

makes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of the

windows:

This setting is suitable for all driving

conditions whenever the outside

temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Switch the fan on.

Turn on the air conditioning.

Select and Fresh Air mode.

Adjust the temperature control

dial so the mixture of heated and

cooled air feels comfortable.

Switch the fan on.

Select .

When you select , the

system automatically switches to

Fresh Air mode and turns on the

A/C.

Adjust the temperature control

dial so the air flow from the

defroster vents feels warm.

Turn on the rear window defogger

to help clear the rear window.

When you switch to another mode

from , the A/C stays on.

PresstheA/Cbuttontoturnitoff.

Start the engine.

Select .

When you select ,the

system automatically switches to

Fresh Air mode.

Set the fan to the desired speed.

Adjust the warmth of the air with

the temperature control dial.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with Air

Conditioning

To Defog and Defrost

111

01/06/02 17:02:40 31S5A610_114

Start the engine.

Select .

When you select , the

system automatically switches to

Fresh Air mode and turns on the

A/C.

Switch the fan and temperature

controls to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost or

ice from the windshield (on very cold

days), first select the Recirculation

mode. Once the windshield is clear,

select the Fresh Air mode to avoid

fogging the windows.

To remove exterior frost or ice from

the windshield and side windows

after the car has been sitting out in

cold weather:

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

112

MMOODDEE CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE

CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL

RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW

DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:02:47 31S5A610_115

For safety, make sure you have a

clear view through all the windows

before driving away.

You should shut the system

completely off only for the first few

minutes of driving in cold weather,

until the engine coolant warms up

enough to operate the heater. Keep

the fan on at all other times so stale

air does not build up in the interior.

To shut off the system temporarily,

turn the fan speed and temperature

control dials all the way to the left.

These settings direct all the air flow

to the defroster vents at the base of

the windshield and the side window

defroster vents. The air flow will get

warmer and clear the windows faster

as the engine warms up. You can

close the side vents with the dial

underneath each vent. This will send

more warm air to the windshield

defroster vents.

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Turn Everything Off

113

01/06/02 17:02:55 31S5A610_116

Your Honda’s audio system provides

clear reception on both AM and FM

bands, while the preset buttons allow

you to easily select your favorite

stations.

The band and frequency that the

radio was last tuned to is displayed.

To change bands, press the AM/FM

button. On the FM band, ST will be

displayed if the station is broadcast-

ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on

AM is not available.

The ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to

operate the audio system. Turn the

system on by pushing the PWR/

VOL knob or the AM/FM button.

Adjust the volume by turning the

PWR/VOL knob.

For DX model in the U.S. and Canada

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM Stereo Audio System

Operating the Radio

114

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:03:05 31S5A610_117

CONTINUED

You can use any of five methods to

find radio stations on the selected

band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO

SELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob to

tune the radio to a desired frequency.

Turn the TUNE knob to the right to

tune to a higher frequency, or to the

left to tune to a lower frequency.

Turn the knob right or left until the

display reaches the desired

frequency.

The SEEK function

searches the band for a station with

a strong signal. To activate it, press

theSEEKbaroneitherthe or

side, then release it.

Depending on which side you press,

the system scans upward or down-

ward from the current frequency. It

stops when it finds a station with a

strong signal.

The SCAN function

samples all the stations with strong

signals on the selected band. To

activate it, press the SCAN button,

then release it. When the system is

in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in

the display. The system will scan up

the band for a station with a strong

signal. When it finds one, it will stop

and play that station for

approximately five seconds. If you do

nothing, the system will then scan

for the next strong station and play

that for five seconds. When it plays a

station that you want to continue

listening to, press the SCAN button

again.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE

SEEK SCAN

115

01/06/02 17:03:12 31S5A610_118

You can store the

frequencies of your favorite radio

stations in the six preset buttons.

Each button will store one frequency

on the AM band, and two

frequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM or

FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store

two frequencies with each Preset

button.

Pick the Preset button you want

for that station. Press the button

and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

of six stations on AM and twelve

on FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,

simply press and release the proper

Preset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost if

your car’s battery goes dead, is

disconnected, or the radio fuse is

removed.

UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN

function to tune the radio to a

desired station.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Preset

116

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:03:23 31S5A610_119

If you are

traveling far from home and can no

longer receive the stations you

preset, you can use the Auto Select

feature to find stations in the local

area.

To activate Auto Select, press the

A. SEL button. A. SEL will appear in

the display, and the system will go

into scan mode for several seconds.

It automatically scans both bands,

looking for stations with strong

signals. It stores the frequencies of

six AM stations and twelve FM

stations in the preset buttons. You

can then use the preset buttons to

select those stations.

If you are in a remote area, Auto

Select may not find six strong AM

stations or twelve strong FM stations.

If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’

displayed when you press any preset

button that does not have a station

stored.

Auto Select does not erase the

frequencies that you preset pre-

viously. When you return home, turn

off Auto Select by pressing the

A. SEL button. The preset buttons

will then select the frequencies you

originally set.

If you do not like the stations Auto

Select has stored, you can store

other frequencies in the preset

buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or

SCAN function to find the desired

frequencies, then store them in the

selected preset buttons as described

previously.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

AUTO SELECT

117

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB SSEEEEKK BBAARR TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:03:32 31S5A610_120

Use these modes to

adjust the tone to your liking. Select

TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE

knob. Adjust the desired mode by

turning the TUNE knob. The level

number on the display shows you the

range.

The system will automatically return

the display to the selected audio

mode about five seconds after you

stop adjusting a mode with the

TUNE knob.

For information, See page .

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are

each adjustable. You select which of

these you want to adjust by pressing

the TUNE knob. The mode changes

fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,

and then back to the selected audio

mode, each time you press the

TUNE knob. Each mode is shown in

the display as it changes.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing the

TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or

Fader to your liking by turning the

TUNE knob. The level number on

the display shows you the range.

These two

modes adjust the strength of the

sound coming from each speaker.

BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,

while FAD adjusts the front-to-back

strength.

144

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Balance/Fader

118

LLEEVVEELL NNUUMMBBEERR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

01/06/02 17:03:42 31S5A610_121

You can use the instrument panel

brightness control knob to adjust the

illumination of the audio system (see

page ). The audio system

illuminates when the parking lights

are on, even if the radio is turned off.

The audio system display usually

shows the time when the ignition

switch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON

(II). It shows the operation mode of

the radio, optional cassette player, or

optional CD player/changer when

you operate them, then goes back to

the time display after five seconds.

To set the hours, press the H (Preset

4) button while pressing the CLOCK

button. Press and hold the H button

until the hour advances to the

desired time.

To set the minutes, press the M

(Preset 5) button while pressing the

CLOCK button. Press and hold the

M button until the minutes numbers

advance to the desired time.

You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time is

before the half hour, the clock is set

back to the previous hour by

pressing and holding the CLOCK

button, then pressing the RESET

(Preset 6) button. If the displayed

time is after the half hour, the clock

is set forward to the beginning of the

next hour.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.

1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example:

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the time setting will be

lost. To set the time again, follow the

setting procedure.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System Lighting

Digital Clock

119

CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

MM BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:03:54 31S5A610_122

The cassette system features Dolby

noise reduction, automatic sensing of

chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and

autoreverse for continuous play.

To operate the cassette player, the

ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make

sure the tape opening on the cassette

is facing to the right, then insert the

cassette most of the way into the slot.

The system will pull it in the rest of

the way, and begin to play.

The tape direction indicator will light

to show you which side of the

cassette is playing. The indicates

thesideyouinsertedfacingupward

is now playing. If you want to play

the other side, press the PLAY/

PROG button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on when

you insert a cassette. The indi-

cator will light in the display. If the

tape was not recorded with Dolby

noise reduction, turn it off by

pressing the NR button.

Noise reduction remains off until you

turn it on by pressing the button

again.

If you turn the system off while a

tape is playing, either with the PWR/

VOL knob or by turning off the

ignition, the cassette will remain in

the drive. When you turn the system

back on, the tape will begin playing

where it left off.

When the system reaches the end of

the tape, it will automatically reverse

direction and play the other side. If

you want to remove the cassette

from the drive, press the EJECT

button on the cassette player.

To switch to the radio or optional CD

player/changer while listening to a

tape, press the AM/FM or CD/

TAPE button. To change back to the

cassette player, press the CD/TAPE

button.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-

ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the Optional Cassette

Player

120

01/06/02 17:04:05 31S5A610_123

With a cassette playing, you can use

the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT

function to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-

wind move the tape rapidly. To re-

wind the tape, push the REW button.

You will see REW in the display. To

fast forward the tape, push the FF

button. You will see FF displayed.

Press the PLAY/PROG button to

take the system out of rewind or fast

forward. If the system reaches the

end of the tape while in fast forward

or rewind, it automatically stops that

function, reverses direction, and

begins to play.

The Skip Function allows

you to find the beginning of a song

or passage. To find the beginning of

the song or passage currently

playing, push the lower part of the

SKIP bar. You will see REW flashing

in the display as the tape rewinds. To

find the beginning of the next song,

push the upper part of the SKIP bar.

You will see FF flashing in the

display as the tape fast forwards.

When the system finds the

beginning of a song or passage, it

goes back to PLAY mode.

CONTINUED

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

SKIP

121

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP BBAARR

NNRR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:04:15 31S5A610_124

The Repeat function

continuously replays the current

song or passage. Press the RPT

button to activate it; you will see RPT

displayed as a reminder. When the

system reaches the end of the song

or passage currently playing, it will

automatically go into rewind. When

it senses the beginning of the same

song or passage, the system returns

to PLAY mode. It will continue to

repeat this same program until you

deactivate REPEAT by pressing the

button again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functions

use silent periods on the tape to find

the end of a song or passage. These

features may not work to your

satisfaction if there is almost no gap

between selections, a high noise

level between selections, or a silent

period in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam inside

the drive or cause other problems.

See page for information on

cassette care and protection.

156

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Caring for Cassettes

REPEAT

122

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP BBAARR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:04:23 31S5A610_125

A trunk-mounted Compact Disc

changer is available from your dealer.

It holds up to six discs, providing

several hours of continuous

entertainment. You operate the CD

changer with the same controls used

for the radio.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-

dash single CD player available that

is operated by the radio controls. To

operate this unit, use the instructions

(except for those relating to multiple

discs) in this section.

To operate the CD changer or player,

the ignition must be in ACCESSORY

(I) or ON (II) and the audio system

must be on.

CONTINUED

Operating the Optional CD

Player/Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

123

RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONN

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONNCCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

DDIISSCC BBUUTTTTOONNSSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

01/06/02 17:04:32 31S5A610_126

Press the CD/TAPE button. You will

see ‘‘CDC’’ in the display. The

system will start to play the first

track of the first disc. When that disc

ends, the next disc in the magazine

is loaded and played. After the last

disc finishes, the system returns to

disc 1.

To select a different disc, press the

DISC (Preset 6) or DISC

(Preset 5) button. The next disc in

the changer is loaded and played

when you press the DISC button.

DISC loads and plays the previous

disc. If you select an empty slot in

the magazine, the changer will, after

finding that slot empty, try to load

the CD in the next slot. This

continues until it finds a CD to load

and play.

Insert the disc into the CD slot. Push

the disc in halfway, the drive will pull

it in the rest of the way. Push the

CD/TAPE button and the disc will

start to play.

You will see the track number being

played in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs

without using an adapter ring. In all

cases, play only standard round discs.

Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the

driveorcauseotherproblems.

Press the EJECT button to remove

the disc from the player.

When the system reaches the end of

the disc, it will return to the begin-

ning and play that disc again.

For best results when using CD-R

discs, use only high quality discs

labeled for audio use. When

recording a CD-R, the recording

must be closed in order for the disc

to be used by CD players. CD-RW

discs will not work in this unit.

If you eject the disc, but do not

remove it from the slot, the system

will automatically reload the disc

after 15 seconds and put the CD

player in pause mode. To begin

playing the disc, press the CD/TAPE

button.

Using the instructions that came

with the changer, load the desired

CDs in the magazine, and load the

magazine in the changer. Play only

standard round discs. Odd-shaped

CDs may jam in the drive or cause

other problems.

If you eject the disc, but do not

remove it from the slot, the system

will automatically reload the disc

after 15 seconds and put the CD

player in pause mode. To begin

playing the disc, press the CD/TAPE

button.

Press the EJECT button to remove

the disc from the player.

When the system reaches the end of

the disc, it will return to the begin-

ning and play that disc again.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD Player

CD Changer

136

01/06/02 17:06:45 31S5A610_139

When you activate the

RepeatfeaturebypressingtheRPT

button, the system continuously

replays the current track. You will

see RPT in the display as a reminder.

Press the RPT button again to turn it

off.

This feature,

when activated, plays the tracks on a

CD in random order, rather than in

the order they are recorded on the

CD. To activate Random Play, press

the RDM button. You will see RDM

in the display. The system will then

select and play tracks randomly on

the current disc. When all tracks on

that disc have been played, the next

disc is loaded and played randomly.

This continues until you deactivate

RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM

button again.

If you push and hold the SEEK/

SKIP bar, the system will continue to

move across tracks. Release the bar

when you think it has reached the

desired place on the disc.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar to

select tracks within a disc. If you

press and release the SEEK/SKIP

bar, the system will move to the

beginning of a track. Press the

side to move to the beginning

of the next track, and the side

to move to the beginning of the

current track.

To take the system out of CD mode,

press the AM/FM button or insert a

cassette in the player. If a tape is

already in the cassette player, press

the CD/TAPE button. When you

return to CD mode, play will contin-

ue at the same point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CD

is playing, either with the PWR/VOL

knob or the ignition switch, play will

continue at the same point when you

turn it back on.

For information on how to handle

and protect compact discs, see page

For information, See page .

151

152

150

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Protecting Compact Discs

CD Player Error Indications

CD Changer Error Indications

CD Player and Changer

137

01/06/02 17:06:58 31S5A610_140

The band and frequency that the

radio was last tuned to is displayed.

To change bands, press the AM/FM

button. On the FM band, ST will be

displayed if the station is broadcast-

ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on

AM is not available.

Your Honda’s audio system provides

clear reception on both AM and FM

bands, while the preset buttons allow

you to easily select your favorite

stations.

The anti-theft feature will disable the

system if it is disconnected from the

car’s battery. To get the system

working again, you must enter a

code number (see page ).

The ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to

operate the audio system. Turn the

system on by pushing the PWR/

VOL knob or the AM/FM button.

Adjust the volume by turning the

PWR/VOL knob.

157

For EX model in the U.S., and LX and

DX-GOP models in Canada

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio

138

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK BBAARR

AAUUTTOO

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANN

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:07:09 31S5A610_141

CONTINUED

You can use any of five methods to

find radio stations on the selected

band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO

SELECT, and the Preset buttons.

Use the TUNE knob to

tune the radio to a desired frequency.

Turn the TUNE knob to the right to

tune to a higher frequency, or to the

left to tune to a lower frequency.

Turn the knob right or left until the

display reaches the desired

frequency.

The SEEK function

searches the band for a station with

a strong signal. To activate it, press

theSEEKbaroneitherthe or

side, then release it.

Depending on which side you press,

the system scans upward or down-

ward from the current frequency. It

stops when it finds a station with a

strong signal.

The SCAN function

samples all the stations with strong

signals on the selected band. To

activate it, press the SCAN button,

then release it. When the system is

in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in

the display. The system will scan up

the band for a station with a strong

signal. When it finds one, it will stop

and play that station for

approximately five seconds. If you do

nothing, the system will then scan

for the next strong station and play

that for five seconds. When it plays a

station that you want to continue

listening to, press the SCAN button

again.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

TUNE

SEEK SCAN

139

01/06/02 17:07:16 31S5A610_142

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total

of six stations on AM and twelve

on FM.

Pick the Preset button you want

for that station. Press the button

and hold it until you hear a beep.

Select the desired band, AM or

FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store

two frequencies with each Preset

button.

To store a frequency:

Once a station’s frequency is stored,

simply press and release the proper

preset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost if

your car’s battery goes dead, is

disconnected, or the radio fuse is

removed.

You can store the

frequencies of your favorite radio

stations in the six preset buttons.

Each button will store one frequency

on the AM band, and two

frequencies on the FM band.

UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN

function to tune the radio to a

desired station.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Preset

140

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSTTEERREEOO IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSCCAANN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

SSEEEEKK BBAARR

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAUUTTOO

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN

BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

01/06/02 17:07:27 31S5A610_143

If you are

traveling far from home and can no

longer receive the stations you

preset, you can use the Auto Select

feature to find stations in the local

area.

To activate Auto Select, press the

A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in

the display, and the system will go

into scan mode for several seconds.

It automatically scans both bands,

looking for stations with strong

signals. It stores the frequencies of

six AM stations and twelve FM

stations in the preset buttons. You

can then use the preset buttons to

select those stations.

Auto Select does not erase the

frequencies that you preset pre-

viously. When you return home, turn

off Auto Select by pressing the

A. SEL button. The preset buttons

will then select the frequencies you

originally set.

If you are in a remote area, Auto

Select may not find six strong AM

stations or twelve strong FM stations.

If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’

displayed when you press any preset

button that does not have a station

stored.

If you do not like the stations Auto

Select has stored, you can store

other frequencies in the preset

buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or

SCAN function to find the desired

frequencies, then store them in the

selected preset buttons as described

previously.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

141

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK BBAARR

PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS

AAUUTTOO

SSEELLEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN

BBUUTTTTOONN

AAUUTTOO SSEELLEECCTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

01/06/02 17:07:35 31S5A610_144

The system will automatically return

the display to the selected audio

mode about five seconds after you

stop adjusting a mode with the

TUNE knob.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are

each adjustable. You select which of

these you want to adjust by pressing

the TUNE knob. The mode changes

fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,

and then back to the selected audio

mode, each time you press the

TUNE knob. Each mode is shown in

the display as it changes.

These two

modes adjust the strength of the

sound coming from each speaker.

BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,

while FAD adjusts the front-to-back

strength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing the

TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or

Fader to your liking by turning the

TUNE knob.

The displayed number shows you

the current setting.

When the adjustment level reaches

the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Use these modes to

adjust the tone to your liking. Select

TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE

knob. Adjust the desired mode by

turning the TUNE knob.

The displayed number shows you

the current setting.

When the adjustment level reaches

the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

142

TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB

AAddjjuussttmmeenntt LLeevveell

01/06/02 17:07:46 31S5A610_145

The display of your audio system

usually shows the time when the

ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (I)

or ON (II). It shows the operation

mode of the radio, CD player, or

optional CD changer/cassette player

when you operate them, and goes

back to the time display after five

seconds.

You can use the instrument panel

brightness control knob to adjust the

illumination of the audio system (see

page ). The audio system

illuminates when the parking lights

are on, even if the radio is turned off.

If an error occurs while operating

the CD player or optional CD

changer, the display will show the

error code and will not switch to the

time display until the error is

corrected (see pages and ).

You can set the time only when the

clock is displayed.

To set the hours, press the H (Preset

4) button while pressing the CLOCK

(SCAN/RPT) button. Press and hold

the H button until the hour advances

to the desired time.

To set the minutes, press the M

(Preset 5) button while pressing the

CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button. Press

andholdtheMbuttonuntilthe

minutes numbers advance to the

desired time.

152151

CONTINUED

Audio System Lighting

Digital Clock

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

143

CCLLOOCCKK BBUUTTTTOONN

HH BBUUTTTTOONN

MM BBUUTTTTOONN

RREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:07:57 31S5A610_146

Your Honda’s radio can receive the

complete AM and FM bands.

Those bands cover these frequen-

cies:

AM band:

530 to 1,710 kilohertz

FM band:

87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band are

assigned frequencies at least ten

kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).

Stations on the FM band are

assigned frequencies at least 0.2

megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact

frequencies. It is fairly common for

stations to round-off the frequency in

their advertising, so your radio could

display a frequency of 100.9 even

though the announcer may identify

the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.

1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the time setting will be

lost. To set the time again, follow the

setting procedure.

You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time is

before the half hour, the clock is set

back to the previous hour by

pressing and holding the CLOCK

(SCAN/RPT) button, then pressing

the RESET (Preset 6) button. If the

displayed time is after the half hour,

the clock is set forward to the

beginning of the next hour.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Radio Frequencies

144

01/06/02 17:08:09 31S5A610_147

CONTINUED

Driving very near the transmitter of

a station that is broadcasting on a

frequency close to the frequency of

the station you are listening to can

also affect your radio’s reception.

You may temporarily hear both

stations,orhearonlythestationyou

are close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weaker

as you get farther away from its

transmitter. If you are listening to an

AM station, you will notice the sound

volume becoming weaker, and the

stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare

listening to an FM station, you will

see the stereo indicator flickering off

and on as the signal weakens.

Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fade

completely as you get out of range of

the station’s signal.

How well your Honda’s radio

receives stations is dependent on

many factors, such as the distance

from the station’s transmitter,

nearby large objects, and atmos-

pheric conditions.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Radio Reception

145

01/06/02 17:08:17 31S5A610_148

Radio signals, especially on the FM

band, are deflected by large objects

such as buildings and hills. Your

radio then receives both the direct

signal from the station’s transmitter,

and the deflected signal. This causes

the sound to distort or flutter. This is

a main cause of poor radio reception

in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by

atmospheric conditions such as

thunderstorms, high humidity, and

even sunspots. You may be able to

receive a distant radio station one

day and not receive it the next day

because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can

cause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

146

01/06/02 17:08:25 31S5A610_149

CONTINUED

You operate the CD player with the

same controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert

the disc into the CD slot. Push the

disc in halfway, the drive will pull it

in the rest of the way and begin to

play. The number of the track that is

playing is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs

without using an adapter ring. Play

only standard round discs. Odd-

shaped CDs may jam in the drive or

cause other problems.

For best results when using CD-R

discs, use only high quality discs

labeled for audio use. When

recording a CD-R, the recording

must be closed in order for the disc

to be used by CD players. CD-RW

discs will not work in this unit.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the CD Player

147

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RRAANNDDOOMM BBUUTTTTOONN

SSEEEEKK//SSKKIIPP BBAARR

RRAANNDDOOMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

EEJJEECCTT

BBUUTTTTOONN

SSCCAANN//RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD SSLLOOTT

01/06/02 17:08:35 31S5A610_150

Each time you press and release the

side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to the

beginning of the next track. Press

the sidetoskipbackwardtothe

beginning of the current track. Press

it again to skip to the beginning of

the previous track.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar

while a disc is playing to select

passages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, press

andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press

the side to move forward. You

will see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. You

will see REW displayed. Release the

bar when the system reaches the

point you want.

To activate the Repeat

feature, press and release the RPT

button. You will see RPT in the

display. The system continuously

replays the current track. Press the

RPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,

when activated, plays the tracks on

the CD in random order, rather than

in the order they are recorded on the

CD. To activate Random Play, press

the RDM button. You will see RDM

in the display. The system will then

select and play tracks randomly.

This continues until you deactivate

RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM

button again.

If you eject the disc, but do not

remove it from the slot, the system

will automatically reload the disc

after 15 seconds and put the CD

player in pause mode. To begin

playing the disc, press the CD button.

Press the eject button to remove the

disc from the drive.

If you turn the system off while a CD

is playing, either with the PWR/VOL

knob or by turning off the ignition,

the disc will stay in the drive. When

youturnthesystembackon,theCD

will begin playing where it left off.

You can switch to the radio while a

CD is playing by pressing the AM/

FM button. Press the CD button to

return to playing the CD. The CD

will begin playing where it left off.

When the system reaches the end of

the disc, it will return to the begin-

ning and play that disc again.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

148

01/06/02 17:08:48 31S5A610_151

Load the desired CDs in the

magazine and load the magazine in

the changer according to the

instructions that came with the unit.

Play only standard round discs. Odd-

shaped CDs may jam in the drive or

cause other problems.

Ifyouejectthediscinthein-dash

CD while it is playing, the system

will automatically switch to the CD

changer and begin play where it left

off. If there are no CDs in the

changer, the display will flash. You

will have to select another mode

(AM or FM) with the button.

A trunk-mounted Compact Disc

changer is available from your dealer.

It holds up to six discs, providing

several hours of continuous

entertainment. You operate this CD

changer with the same controls used

for the in-dash CD player.

If you load a CD in the in-dash player

while the changer is playing a CD,

the system will stop the changer and

begin playing the in-dash CD. To

select the changer again, press the

CD button. Play will begin where it

left off. Use the CD button to switch

between the player and the changer.

To select a different disc, press the

DISC (Preset 6) or DISC

(Preset 5) button. The next disc in

the changer is loaded and played

when you press the DISC button.

DISC loads and plays the previous

disc. If you select an empty slot in

the magazine, the changer will, after

finding that slot empty, try to load

the CD in the next slot. This

continues until it finds a CD to load

and play.

To select the CD changer, press the

CD button. The disc and track

numbers will be displayed.

For best results when using CD-R

discs, use only high quality discs

labeled for audio use. When

recording a CD-R, the recording

must be closed in order for the disc

to be used by CD players. CD-RW

discs will not work in this unit.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and

RANDOM functions, refer to the in-

dash player operating instructions.

When you switch back to CD mode,

the system selects the same unit (in-

dash or changer) that was playing

when you switched out of CD mode.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the CD Changer

(Optional)

149

01/06/02 17:08:59 31S5A610_152

When a CD is not being played, store

it in its case to protect it from dust

and other contamination. To prevent

warpage, keep CDs out of direct

sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.

Wipe across the disc from the center

to the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on the

inner and outer edges. The small

plastic pieces causing this roughness

can flake off and fall on the re-

cording surface of the disc, causing

skipping or other problems. Remove

these pieces by rubbing the inner

and outer edges with the side of a

pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; never

touch either surface. Do not place

stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.

These and contamination from

fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens

can cause the CD to not play

properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

150

01/06/02 17:09:09 31S5A610_153

If you see an error indication in the

display while operating the CD

player,findthecauseinthechartto

the right. If you cannot clear the

error indication, take the car to your

Honda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD

player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.

Check the disc for damage or deformation.

If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error

indication does not disappear after the disc is

ejected, see your Honda dealer.

Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Will disappear when the temperature returns to

normal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD Player Error Indications

151

01/06/02 17:09:18 31S5A610_154

If you see an error indication in the

display while operating the CD

changer, find the cause in the chart

to the right. If you cannot clear the

error indication, take the car to your

Honda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the magazine eject button and pull out

the magazine, check for error indication. Insert

the magazine again. If the code does not

disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,

consult your Honda dealer.

Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull out

the magazine, check for error indication. Insert

the magazine again. If the code does not

disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,

consult your Honda dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns to

normal.

Insert CD magazine.

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CD

magazine

Mechanical Error

High temperature

No CD magazine in the

CD changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD Changer Error Indications

152

01/06/02 17:09:29 31S5A610_155

CONTINUED

The cassette system features Dolby

noise reduction, automatic sensing of

chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and

autoreverse for continuous play.

To operate the optional cassette

player, the ignition switch must be in

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) and the

audio system must be on.

Make sure the tape opening on the

cassette is facing to the right, then

insert the cassette most of the way

into the slot. The system will pull it

in the rest of the way, and begin to

play.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under

license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-

ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

Licensing Corporation.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating the Cassette Player

(Optional)

153

NNRR BBUUTTTTOONN

PPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB

AAMM//FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN

CCDD//TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN

PPLLAAYY//PPRROOGG BBUUTTTTOONN

FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN

RREEPPEEAATT

BBUUTTTTOONN

SSKKIIPP BBAARR

NNOOIISSEE RREEDDUUCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:09:40 31S5A610_156

With a cassette playing, you can use

the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT

function to find a desired program.

The tape direction indicator will light

to show you which side of the

cassette is playing. The indicates

thesideyouinsertedfacingupward

is now playing. If you want to play

the other side, press the PLAY/

PROG button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on when

you insert a cassette. The indi-

cator will light in the display. If the

tape was not recorded with Dolby

noise reduction, turn it off by

pressing the NR button.

Noise reduction remains off until you

turn it on by pressing the button

again.

When the system reaches the end of

the tape, it will automatically reverse

direction and play the other side. If

you want to remove the cassette

from the drive, press the EJECT

button on the cassette player.

If you turn the system off while a

tape is playing, either with the PWR/

VOL knob or by turning off the

ignition, the cassette will remain in

the drive. When you turn the system

back on, the cassette player will be in

pause mode. To begin playing, press

the PLAY/PROG button.

To switch to the radio or CD player

while a tape is playing, press the

AM/FM, or CD/TAPE button. To

change back to the cassette player,

press the CD/TAPE button.

Fast Forward and Re-

wind move the tape rapidly. To re-

wind the tape, push the REW button.

You will see REW in the display. To

fast forward the tape, push the FF

button. You will see FF displayed.

Press the PLAY/PROG button to

take the system out of rewind or fast

forward. If the system reaches the

end of the tape while in fast forward

or rewind, it automatically stops that

function, reverses direction, and

begins to play.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

154

01/06/02 17:09:50 31S5A610_157

The SKIP and REPEAT functions

use silent periods on the tape to find

the end of a song or passage. These

features may not work to your

satisfaction if there is almost no gap

between selections, a high noise

level between selections, or a silent

period in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat function

continuously replays the current

song or passage. Press the RPT

button to activate it; you will see RPT

displayed as a reminder. When the

system reaches the end of the song

or passage currently playing, it will

automatically go into rewind. When

it senses the beginning of the same

song or passage, the system returns

to PLAY mode. It will continue to

repeat this same program until you

deactivate REPEAT by pressing the

button again.

The Skip Function allows

you to find the beginning of a song

or passage. To find the beginning of

the song or passage currently

playing, push the lower part of the

SKIP bar. You will see REW flashing

in the display as the tape rewinds. To

find the beginning of the next song,

push the upper part of the SKIP bar.

You will see FF flashing in the

display as the tape fast forwards.

When the system finds the

beginning of a song or passage, it

goes back to PLAY mode.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

REPEATSKIP

155

01/06/02 17:09:56 31S5A610_158

If you do not clean the cassette

player regularly, it may eventually

become impossible to remove the

contamination with a normal

cleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.

Cassettes longer than that use

thinner tape that may break or jam

the drive.

Look at the cassette before you

insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten

it by turning a hub with a pencil or

your finger.

The cassette player picks up dirt and

oxides from the tape. This contami-

nation builds up over time and

causes the sound quality to degrade.

To prevent this, you should clean the

player after every 30 hours of use.

Your dealer has a cleaning kit

available.

Never try to insert foreign objects

into the cassette player.

When they are not in use, store

cassettes in their cases to protect

them from dust and moisture. Never

place cassettes where they will be

exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,

or high humidity. If a cassette is

exposed to extreme heat or cold, let

it reach a moderate temperature

before inserting it in the player.

If the label is peeling off, remove it

from the cassette or it could cause

the cassette to jam in the player.

Never try to insert a warped or

damaged cassette in the player.

If you see the error indication

‘‘ ’’ on the display, press

the EJECT button and remove the

cassette from the unit. Make sure

thetapeisnotdamaged.Ifthe

cassette will not eject or the error

indication stays on after the cassette

ejects, take the car to your Honda

dealer.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Caring for the Cassette Player

156

01/06/02 17:10:06 31S5A610_159

You will have to store your favorite

stations in the Preset buttons after

the system begins working. Your

original settings were lost when

power was disconnected.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, or the radio fuse is

removed, the audio system will

disable itself. If this happens, you

will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency

display the next time you turn on the

system. Use the Preset buttons to

enter the five-digit code. If it is

entered correctly, the radio will start

playing.

If you make a mistake entering the

code, do not start over or try to

correct your mistake. Complete the

five-digit sequence, then enter the

correct code. You have ten tries to

enter the correct code. If you are

unsuccessful in ten attempts, you

must then leave the system on for

one hour before trying again.

Your car’s audio system will disable

itself if it is disconnected from

electrical power for any reason. To

make it work again, the user must

enter a specific five-digit code in the

Preset buttons. Because there are

hundreds of number combinations

possible from five digits, making the

system work without knowing the

exact code is nearly impossible.

Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat

lists your audio system’s code

number and serial number. It is best

tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat

home. In addition, you should write

the audio system’s serial number in

this Owner’s Manual. If you should

happen to lose the card, you must

obtain the code number from your

Honda dealer. To do this, you will

need the system’s serial number.

CONTINUED

On EX model in the U.S., and LX and

DX-GOP models in Canada

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Theft Protection

157

01/06/02 17:10:16 31S5A610_160

When the audio system disables

itself, you can see the eight-digit

audio system serial number on the

display. To display the serial

number:

Turn the ignition switch to

ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Push the PWR/VOL knob to turn

on the audio system while

pressing the Preset 1 and 6

buttons at the same time.

You will see the first 4-digit

number on the display for five

seconds, then the next 4-digit

number is shown for five seconds.

You will see 8-digit serial number

in total. This procedure is repeated

once again.

After you have entered the audio

system’s code number correctly, the

serial number will not be displayed.

On EX model in the U.S., and LX and

DX-GOP models in Canada

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Displaying Audio System’s Serial

Number

158

01/06/02 17:10:24 31S5A610_161

Accelerate to the desired cruising

speedabove25mph(40km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control Master

Switch to the left of the steering

column. The indicator in the

switch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintain

asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)

without keeping your foot on the

accelerator pedal. It should be used

for cruising on straight, open

highways. It is not recommended for

conditions such as city driving,

winding roads, slippery roads, heavy

rain, or bad weather. You should

have full control of the car under

those conditions.

CONTINUED

OnLXandEXmodelsintheU.S.,and

LX model in Canada

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

159

Improper use of the cruise

control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only

when traveling on open

highways in good weather.

01/06/02 17:10:33 31S5A610_162

You can increase the set cruising

speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/

accel button. The car will acceler-

ate. When you reach the desired

cruising speed, release the button.

Press and release the SET/decel

buttononthesteeringwheel.The

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel comes on to

show the system is now activated.

Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe

set speed when you are going up and

down hills. If your speed increases

going down a hill, use the brakes to

slow down to the desired speed. This

will cancel the cruise control. To

resume the set speed, press the

RESUME/accel button. The

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, the

automatic transmission may

downshift to hold the set speed.

To increase your speed in very

small amounts, tap the RESUME/

accel button repeatedly. Each time

you do this, your car will speed up

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-

celerate to the desired cruising

speed and press the SET/decel

button.

Changing the Set Speed

Comfort and Convenience Features

Cruise Control

160

RREESSUUMMEE//

aacccceell

SSEETT//ddeecceell

01/06/02 17:10:43 31S5A610_163

Even with the cruise control turned

on, you can still use the accelerator

pedal to speed up for passing. After

completing the pass, take your foot

off the accelerator pedal. The car

will return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake or

clutch pedal will cause the cruise

control to cancel.

You can decrease the set cruising

speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decel

button. The car will decelerate.

Release the button when you

reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very small

amounts, tap the SET/decel

button repeatedly. Each time you

do this, your car will slow down

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedal

lightly with your foot. The

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel will go out.

When the car slows to the desired

speed, press the SET/decel button.

The car will then maintain the

desired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin

any of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on the

steering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control Master

Switch.

CONTINUED

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

161

CCAANNCCEELL

BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:10:56 31S5A610_164

When you push the CANCEL button,

or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the

CRUISE CONTROL light on the

instrument panel will go out and the

car will begin to slow down. You can

use the accelerator pedal in the

normal way.

The system remembers the

previously-set cruising speed. To

return to that speed, accelerate to

above25mph(40km/h),thenpress

the RESUME/accel button. The

CRUISE CONTROL light comes on,

and the car will accelerate to the

same cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control Master

Switch turns the system completely

off and erases the previous cruising

speed from memory. To use the

system again, refer to

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using the

Cruise Control

162

01/06/02 17:11:02 31S5A610_165

Before you begin driving your Honda,

youshouldknowwhatgasolineto

use, and how to check the levels of

important fluids. You also need to

know how to properly store luggage

or packages. The information in this

section will help you. If you plan to

add any accessories to your car,

please read the information in this

section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 164

.........................................Gasoline . 164

.........Service Station Procedures . 165

................Filling the Fuel Tank . 165

....................Opening the Hood . 166

...............................Oil Check . 168

.........Engine Coolant Check . 169

...............................Fuel Economy . 170

.....................Vehicle Condition . 170

...........................Driving Habits . 170

...Accessories and Modifications . 171

.............................Carrying Cargo . 173

Before Driving

163

01/06/02 17:11:07 31S5A610_166

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid

acceleration.

Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes

need to be broken-in by moderate

use for the first 200 miles (300

km).

Your Honda is designed to operate

on unleaded gasoline with a pump

octane number of 86 or higher. Use

of a lower octane gasoline can cause

a persistent, heavy metallic rapping

noise in the engine that can lead to

mechanical damage.

We recommend gasolines containing

detergent additives that help prevent

fuel system and engine deposits.

In Canada, some gasolines contain

an octane-enhancing additive called

MMT. If you use such gasolines,

your emission control system

performance may deteriorate and

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on

your instrument panel may turn on.

If this happens, contact your

authorized Honda dealer for service.

Help assure your car’s future

reliability and performance by paying

extra attention to how you drive

during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead will

damage your car’s emissions

controls. This contributes to air

pollution.

Youshouldfollowthesesamere-

commendations with an overhauled

or exchanged engine, or when the

brakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until the

recommended time or mileage

intervalshowninthemaintenance

schedule.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

164

01/06/02 17:11:18 31S5A610_167

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as

pressure inside the tank escapes.

Because the fuel fill cap is on the

driver’s side of the car, park with

that side closest to the service

station pumps.

Your car has an on-board refueling

vapor recovery system to help

keep fuel vapors from going into

the atmosphere. If the fuel nozzle

keeps clicking off even though the

tank is not full, there may be a

problem with this system. Consult

your dealer.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel

nozzle automatically clicks off. Do

not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave

some room for the fuel to expand

with temperature changes.

Open the fuel fill door by pushing

onthehandletotheleftofthe

driver’s seat.

CONTINUED

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

165

FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP

PPuusshh

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. You can be

burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keep

heat, sparks, and flame away.

Handle fuel only outdoors.

Wipe up spills immediately.

01/06/02 17:11:30 31S5A610_168

Shift to Park or Neutral and set

the parking brake. Pull the hood

release handle located under the

lower left corner of the dashboard.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,

tighten it until it clicks several

times. If you do not properly

tighten the cap, the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp may come on (see

page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.

Standing in front of the car, put

your fingers between the front

edge of the hood and the front

grille. The hood latch handle is

above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this

handle up until it releases the

hood. Lift the hood.

1. 2.

281

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

166

HHOOOODD

RREELLEEAASSEE

HHAANNDDLLEE

LLAATTCCHH

01/06/02 17:11:40 31S5A610_169

If you can open the hood without

lifting the hood latch handle, or the

hood latch handle moves stiffly or

does not spring back as before, the

mechanism should be cleaned and

lubricated (see page ).

Pull the support rod out of its clip

by holding the grip and insert the

end into the hole on the front left

side of the hood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly to

remove the support rod from the

hole. Put the support rod back into

its holding clip. Lower the hood to

about a foot (30 cm) above the

fender,thenletitdrop.

After closing the hood, make sure it

is securely latched.

226

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

167

CCLLIIPP

SSUUPPPPOORRTT RROODD

GGRRIIPP

01/06/02 17:11:47 31S5A610_170

Wipe the dipstick with a clean

cloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick (orange

handle).

Check the engine oil level every time

you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few

minutes after turning the engine off

before you check the oil.

2. 3.

Oil Check

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

168

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

01/06/02 17:11:57 31S5A610_171

Remove the dipstick again and

check the level. It should be

between the upper and lower

marks.

Look at the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is

between the MAX and MIN lines. If

it is below the MIN line, see

on page for

information on adding the proper

coolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,

see on page .

Refer to

on page for information

on checking other items in your

Honda.

209

213

207

Adding

Engine Coolant

Adding Oil

Owner Maintenance

Checks

Engine Coolant Check

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

169

LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK

MMAAXX

UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

MMIINN

01/06/02 17:12:07 31S5A610_172

A cold engine uses more fuel than a

warm engine. It is not necessary to

‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it

idle for a long time. You can drive

away in about a minute, no matter

how cold it is outside. The engine

will warm up faster, and you get

better fuel economy. To cut down on

the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to

combine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy by

driving moderately. Rapid acceler-

ation, abrupt cornering, and hard

braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear that

allows the engine to run and acceler-

ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extra

load on the engine which makes it

usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto

cut down on air conditioning use.

Use the flow-through ventilation

when the outside air temperature is

moderate.

The condition of your car and your

driving habits are the two most

important things that affect the fuel

mileage you get.

Always maintain your car according

to the maintenance schedule. This

will keep it in top operating condition.

Depending on traffic conditions, try

to maintain a constant speed. Every

time you slow down and speed up,

your car uses extra fuel. Use the

cruise control, when appropriate, to

increase fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-

nance is the

(see page ). For

example, an underinflated tire

causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’

which uses fuel. It also wears out

faster, so check the tire pressure at

least monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow on

your car’s underside adds weight and

rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning

helps your fuel mileage and reduces

thechanceofcorrosion.

207

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner Maintenance

Checks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

170

01/06/02 17:12:20 31S5A610_173

Modifying your car, or installing

some non-Honda accessories, can

make your car unsafe. Before you

make any modifications or add any

accessories,besuretoreadthe

following information.

When properly installed, cellular

phones, alarms, two-way radios, and

low-powered audio systems should

not interfere with your car’s

computer-controlled systems, such

as the SRS and anti-lock brake

system.

If possible, have your dealer inspect

the final installation.

Have the installer contact your

Honda dealer for assistance before

installing any electronic accessory.

Be sure electronic accessories do

not overload electrical circuits

(see page ).

Make sure the accessory does not

obscure any lights, or interfere

with proper car operation or

performance.

Before installing any accessory:

However, if electronic accessories

are improperly installed, or exceed

your car’s electrical system capacity,

they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause the

airbags to deploy.

Your dealer has Honda accessories

that allow you to personalize your car.

These accessories have been

designed and approved for your car,

and are covered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usually

designed for universal applications.

Although aftermarket accessories

may fit on your car, they may not

meet factory specifications, and

could adversely affect your car’s

handling and stability. (See

‘‘Modifications’’ on page for

additional information.)

285

172

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

171

Improper accessories or

modifications can affect your

car’s handling, stability and

performance, and cause a

crash in which you can be hurt

or killed.

Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding

accessories and modifications.

01/06/02 17:12:33 31S5A610_174

In addition, any modifications that

decrease ground clearance increase

the chance of undercarriage parts

striking a curb, speed bump, or other

raised object, which could cause

your airbags to deploy.

Do not modify your steering wheel

or any other part of your

Supplemental Restraint System.

Modifications could make the

system ineffective.

Do not remove any original

equipment or modify your car in any

way that would alter its design or

operation. This could make your car

unsafe and illegal to drive.

For example, do not make any

modifications that would change the

ride height of your car, or install

wheels and tires with a different

overall diameter.

Such modifications can adversely

affect handling, and interfere with

the operation of the car’s anti-lock

brakes and other systems.

If a side airbag

inflates,acupholderorotherhard

object attached on or near the

door could be propelled inside the

car and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of a

front seat-back, with a non-Honda

seat cover for example, could

prevent the airbag from inflating

properly.Any object

attached to or placed on the covers

marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the

center of the steering wheel and

on top of the dashboard, could

interfere with the proper operation

of the airbags. Or, if the airbags

inflate, the objects could be

propelled inside the car and hurt

someone.

Only on U.S. models equipped with side

airbags

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach hard objects on or

near a front door.

Do not place any objects over the

outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.

Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers.

172

01/06/02 17:12:45 31S5A610_175

Your car has several convenient

storage areas so you can stow cargo

safely.

However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect

your car’s handling, stability, and

operation and make it unsafe. Before

carrying any type of cargo, be sure to

read the following pages.

The glove box, and the pockets in

the front doors and seat-back, are

designed for small, lightweight items.

The trunk is intended for larger,

heavier items. In addition, the back

seatcanbefoldeddowntoallowyou

to carry more cargo or longer items.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

173

FFRROONNTT DDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETT

GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX

TTRRUUNNKK

11:: OOnn EEXX aanndd CCaannaaddiiaann LLXX mmooddeellss

22:: OOnn EEXX aanndd LLXX mmooddeellss

SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETT

CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

01/06/02 17:12:53 31S5A610_176

Store or secure all items that could

be thrown around and hurt

someone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floor

behind the front seats cannot roll

under the seats and interfere with

the driver’s ability to operate the

pedals, or with the proper

operation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If the lid is open, a

passenger could injure their knees

during a crash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weight

of all occupants, cargo, and

accessories.

To figure out how much cargo you

can carry:

Add up the weight of all occupants.

The final number is the total weight

of cargo you can carry.

The maximum load for your car is

850 lbs (395 kg).

Subtract the total from 850 lbs

(395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of the

trunk panel. They can block your

view and be thrown around the car

during a crash.

Carrying Items in the Passenger

Compartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

174

Overloading or improper

loading can affect handling and

stability and cause a crash in

which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this

manual.

01/06/02 17:13:05 31S5A610_177

Distribute cargo evenly on the

floor of the trunk, placing the

heaviest items on the bottom and

as far forward as possible.

Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie

down items that could be thrown

about the car during a crash or

sudden stop.

If you can carry any items on a

roofrack,besurethetotalweight

of the rack and the items does not

exceed the maximum allowable

weight. Please contact your Honda

dealer for further information.

If you carry large items that

prevent you from closing the trunk

lid, exhaust gas can enter the

passenger area. To avoid the

possibility of carbon monoxide

poisoning, follow the instructions

on page .54

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on

a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

175

01/06/02 17:13:12 31S5A610_178

176

01/06/02 17:13:14 31S5A610_179

This section gives you tips on

starting the engine under various

conditions, and how to operate the

5-speed manual and automatic

transmissions. It also includes impor-

tant information on parking your car,

and the braking system.

........................Preparing to Drive . 178

.......................Starting the Engine . 179

Starting in Cold Weather

....................at High Altitude . 179

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 180

.....Recommended Shift Points . 181

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 181

..............Automatic Transmission . 182

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 182

................Shift Lever Positions . 183

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 185

....................Shift Lock Release . 186

...........................................Parking . 187

..............................Parking Tips . 187

.....................The Braking System . 188

.............Brake Wear Indicators . 188

...............Brake System Design . 189

.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 189

Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 190

........................ABS Indicator . 191

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 192

...........................Towing a Trailer . 193

Driving

177

01/06/02 17:13:20 31S5A610_180

Make sure all windows, mirrors,

and outside lights are clean and

unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,

or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk are

fully closed.

Make sure the doors are securely

closed and locked.

Check that any items you may be

carrying with you inside are stored

properly or fastened down

securely.

Visually check the tires. If a tire

looks low, use a gauge to check its

pressure.

Check the adjustment of the seat

(see page ).

Check the adjustment of the

inside and outside mirrors (see

page ).

Check the adjustment of the

steering wheel (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Check the indicator lights in the

instrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicator

lights in the instrument panel (see

page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check that

your passengers have fastened

their seat belts (see page ).

Youshoulddothefollowingchecks

and adjustments every day before

you drive your car.

4. 9.

10.

11.

12.

179

Preparing to Drive

Driving

178

01/06/02 17:13:33 31S5A610_181

If the engine does not start within

15 seconds, or starts but stalls

right away, repeat step 4 with the

accelerator pedal pressed half-way

down. If the engine starts, release

pressure on the accelerator pedal

so the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,

press the accelerator pedal all the

way down and hold it there while

starting in order to clear flooding.

As before, keep the ignition key in

the START (III) position for no

more than 15 seconds. Return to

step 5 if the engine does not start.

If it starts, lift your foot off the

accelerator pedal so the engine

does not race.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories to reduce

the drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all the

way. START (III) does not

function unless the clutch pedal is

depressed.

Make sure the shift lever is in

Park. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to the

START (III) position. If the engine

does not start right away, do not

hold the key in START (III) for

more than 15 seconds at a time.

Pause for at least 10 seconds

before trying again. An engine is harder to start in cold

weather. The thinner air found at

high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters) adds to the problem.

Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessories

to reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-

way to the floor and hold it there

while starting the engine. Do not

hold the ignition key in START

(III) for more than 15 seconds.

When the engine starts, release

the accelerator pedal gradually as

the engine speeds up and smooths

out.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,

push the accelerator pedal to the

floor and hold it there while you

try to start the engine for no more

than 15 seconds. If the engine

does not start, return to step 2.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at High

Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/

2,400 meters)

179

01/06/02 17:13:49 31S5A610_182

The manual transmission is syn-

chronizedinallforwardgearsfor

smooth operation. It has a lockout so

you cannot shift directly from Fifth

to Reverse. When shifting up or

down,makesureyoupushtheclutch

pedal down all the way, shift to the

next gear, and let the pedal up

gradually. When you are not shifting,

do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal. This can cause your clutch to

wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the

transmission by trying to shift into

Reverse with the car moving. Push

down the clutch pedal, and pause for

a few seconds before shifting into

Reverse, or shift into one of the

forward gears for a moment. This

stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can get

extra braking from the engine by

shifting to a lower gear. This extra

braking can help you maintain a safe

speed and prevent your brakes from

overheating while going down a

steep hill. Before downshifting,

make sure the vehicle speed is low

enough that you will not activate the

engine speed limiter in the lower

gear. On EX and LX models, make

sure the engine speed will not go into

the tachometer’s red zone in the

lower gear before downshifting.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving

180

Rapid slowing or speeding-up

can cause loss of control on

slippery surfaces. If you crash,

you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving on

slippery surfaces.

01/06/02 17:13:57 31S5A610_183

Drive in the highest gear that lets

the engine run and accelerate

smoothly. This will give you the best

fuel economy and effective emis-

sions control. The following shift

points are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speed

for the gear you are in, the engine

speed will enter into the tachometer’s

red zone. If this occurs, you may feel

the engine cut in and out. This is

caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will

run normally when you reduce the

RPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure the

engine will not go into the

tachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)

27 mph (43 km/h)

39 mph (63 km/h)

53 mph (85 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd

2nd to 3rd

3rd to 4th

4th to 5th

9mph(14km/h)

20 mph (32 km/h)

33 mph (53 km/h)

48 mph (77 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed

for the gear you are in, you may feel

the engine cut in and out. This is

caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will

run normally when you reduce the

engine speed by upshifting or

slowing down.

Before downshifting, make sure the

vehicle speed is low enough that you

will not activate the engine speed

limiter in the lower gear.

Cruise from acceleration

On EX and LX models

On DX model

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

181

01/06/02 17:14:09 31S5A610_184

Your Honda’s transmission has four

forward speeds, and is electronically

controlled for smoother shifting. It

also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter

forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay

feel what seems like another shift

when the converter locks.

This indicator on the instrument

panel shows which position the shift

lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a

few seconds when you turn the

ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes

while driving (in any shift position),

it indicates a possible problem in the

transmission. Avoid rapid acceler-

ation and have the transmission

checkedbyanauthorizedHonda

dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicator

182

EEXX aanndd LLXX

DDXX

01/06/02 17:14:18 31S5A610_185

CONTINUED

Do this:

Press the brake pedal and

press the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

To shift from:

PtoR

RtoP

NtoR

Dto2

2toD

DtoD

DtoN

DtoD

NtoD

RtoN

This position mechani-

cally locks the transmission. Use

Park whenever you are turning off or

starting the engine. To shift out of

Park, you must press on the brake

pedal and have your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Press the release

buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever

to move it.

The shift lever has six positions. It

must be in Park or Neutral to start

the engine. When you are stopped in

D, D , 2, N or R, press firmly on the

brake pedal, and keep your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Positions

Park (P)

183

SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

01/06/02 17:14:27 31S5A610_186

If you have done all of the above and

still cannot move the lever out of

Park, see Shift Lock Release on page

You must also press the release

button to shift into Park. To avoid

transmission damage, come to a

complete stop before shifting into

Park. The shift lever must be in Park

before you can remove the key from

the ignition switch.

To shift to Reverse

from Park, see the explanation under

Park. To shift to Reverse from

Neutral, come to a complete stop and

then shift. Press the release button

before shifting into Reverse from

Neutral.

Use Neutral if you

need to restart a stalled engine, or if

it is necessary to stop briefly with

the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-

tion if you need to leave the car for

any reason. Press on the brake pedal

when you are moving the shift lever

from Neutral to another gear.

Use this position for

your normal driving. The transmis-

sion automatically selects a suitable

gear for your speed and acceleration.

You may notice the transmission

shifting up at higher speeds when

the engine is cold. This helps the

engine warm up faster.

186

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

184

01/06/02 17:14:34 31S5A610_187

If you exceed the maximum speed

for the gear you are in, the engine

speed will enter into the tachometer’s

red zone. If this occurs, you may feel

the engine cut in and out. This is

caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will

run normally when you reduce the

RPM below the red zone.

To shift to Second,

pressthereleasebuttononthefront

of the shift lever. This position locks

thetransmissioninsecondgear.It

does not downshift to first gear

when you come to a stop. Second

gives you more power when climbing,

and increased engine braking when

going down steep hills. Use second

gear when starting out on a slippery

surface or in deep snow. It will help

reduce wheelspin.

If you exceed the maximum speed

for the gear you are in, you may feel

the engine cut in and out. This is

caused by a limiter in the engine’s

computer controls. The engine will

run normally when you reduce the

engine speed by upshifting or

slowing down.

This position is similar

to D, except only the first three

gears are selected. Use D to provide

engine braking when going down a

steep hill. D can also keep the

transmission from cycling between

third and fourth gears in stop-and-go

driving.

ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or

D, you can get the transmission to

automatically downshift by pushing

the accelerator pedal to the floor.

The transmission will shift down one

or two gears, depending on your

speed.

On EX and LX models

On DX model

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Engine Speed LimiterSecond (2)Drive (D )

185

01/06/02 17:14:43 31S5A610_188

This allows you to move the shift

lever out of Park if the normal

method of pushing on the brake

pedal and pressing the release

button does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

Push down on the key while you

pressthereleasebuttononthe

shift lever and move the shift lever

out of Park to Neutral.

Insert the key in the Shift Lock

Release slot.

Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift

Lock Release slot cover next to

the shift lever.

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver

or small metal plate (neither are

included in the tool kit) to remove

the cover. Carefully pry off the

edge of the cover.

Remove the key from the Shift

Lock Release slot, then reinstall

thecover.Makesurethenotchon

the cover is on the left side.

Return the key to the ignition

switch, depress the brake pedal,

and restart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift Lock

Release, it means your car is

developing a problem. Have the car

checked by your Honda dealer.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lock Release

186

RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN

SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK

RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTT

CCOOVVEERR

01/06/02 17:14:57 31S5A610_189

Make sure the moonroof and the

windows are closed.

Make sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving away.

Driving with the parking brake

partially set can overheat or damage

the rear brakes.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,

in the trunk or take them with you.

Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe

remote transmitter.

Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable

materials. The three way catalytic

converter gets very hot, and could

cause these materials to catch on

fire.

Always use the parking brake when

you park your car. The indicator on

the instrument panel shows that the

parking brake is not fully released; it

does not indicate that the parking

brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe

parking brake is set firmly or your

car may roll if it is parked on an

incline.

If your car has an automatic

transmission, set the parking brake

before you put the transmission in

Park.Thiskeepsthecarfrom

moving and putting pressure on the

parking mechanism in the

transmission making it easier to

move the shift lever out of Park

when you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn the

front wheels away from the curb. If

you have a manual transmission, put

it in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn the

front wheels toward the curb. If you

have a manual transmission, put it in

reverse gear.

Parking

Parking Tips

Driving

187

01/06/02 17:15:08 31S5A610_190

Check your brakes after driving

through deep water. Apply the

brakes moderately to see if they feel

normal. If not, apply them gently and

frequently until they do. Since a

longer distance is needed to stop

with wet brakes, be extra cautious

and alert in your driving.

Constant application of the brakes

when going down a long hill builds

up heat and reduces their effective-

ness. Use the engine to assist the

brakes by downshifting to a lower

gear and taking your foot off the

accelerator pedal.

When the brake pads need replacing,

you will hear a distinctive metallic

‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply

the brakes. If you do not have the

brake pads replaced, they will begin

screeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squeal

or squeak when you apply them

lightly. Do not confuse this with the

brakewearindicators.Theymakea

very audible ‘‘screeching.’’

The front disc brakes on all models

have audible brake wear indicators.

All Civics are equipped with front

disc brakes. The brakes on the rear

wheels are drum. A power assist

helps reduce the effort needed on

thebrakepedal.TheABS(oncars

equipped with ABS) helps you retain

steering control when braking very

hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal only

when you intend to brake. Resting

your foot on the pedal keeps the

brakes applied lightly, causing them

to build up heat. Heat build-up can

reduce how well your brakes work. It

also keeps your brake lights on all

the time, confusing drivers behind

you.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving

188

01/06/02 17:15:17 31S5A610_191

CONTINUED

The hydraulic system that operates

the brakes has two separate circuits.

Each circuit works diagonally across

the vehicle (the left-front brake is

connected with the right-rear brake,

etc.). If one circuit should develop a

problem, you will still have braking

at two wheels.

this defeats the

purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS

work for you by always keeping firm,

steady pressure on the brake pedal

as you steer away from the hazard.

This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal when the ABS activates, and

you may hear some noise. This is

normal, it is the ABS rapidly

pumping the brakes.

The U.S. EX and Canadian LX

models have an Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS) as standard

equipment.

It is optional on the U.S. LX model.

ABS helps to prevent the wheels

from locking up and skidding during

hard braking, allowing you to retain

steering control.

When the front tires skid, you lose

steering control; the car continues

straightaheadeventhoughyouturn

the steering wheel. The ABS helps to

prevent lock-up and helps you retain

steering control by pumping the

brakes rapidly; much faster than a

person can do it.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the

brake pedal,

Driving

The Braking System

189

FFrroonntt

01/06/02 17:15:29 31S5A610_192

on loose or

uneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow, than a vehicle without anti-

lock. Slow down and allow a greater

distance between vehicles under

those conditions.

only helps with steering control

during braking. You should always

maintain a safe following distance

from other vehicles.

such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe,

prudent speed for the road and

weather conditions.

Always steer moderately

when you are braking hard. Severe

or sharp steering wheel movement

can still cause your car to veer into

oncoming traffic or off the road.

Activation varies with the amount of

traction your tires have. On dry

pavement, you will need to press on

thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou

activate the ABS. However, you may

feel the ABS activate immediately if

you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The Braking System

Driving

A vehicle with ABS may require a

longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the car,

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from changing direction

abruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss of

stability.

Important Safety Reminders

190

01/06/02 17:15:37 31S5A610_193

The ABS is self-checking. If anything

goes wrong, the ABS indicator on

the instrument panel comes on (see

page ). This means the anti-lock

function of the braking system has

shut down. The brakes still work like

a conventional system without anti-

lock, providing normal stopping

ability. You should have the dealer

inspect your car as soon as possible.

The Braking System

Driving

ABS Indicator

191

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:15:43 31S5A610_194

Being able to see

clearly in all directions and being

visible to other drivers are important

in all weather conditions. This is

more difficult in bad weather. To be

seen more clearly during daylight

hours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers and

washers frequently. Keep the wind-

shield washer reservoir full of the

proper fluid. Have the windshield

wiper blades replaced if they start to

streak the windshield or leave parts

unwiped. Use the defrosters and air

conditioning to keep the windows

from fogging up on the inside (see

page ).

Exercise extra caution when driving

in rain after a long dry spell. After

months of dry weather, the first

rains bring oil to the surface of the

roadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditions

require a different driving technique

because of reduced traction and

visibility. Keep your car well-

maintained and exercise greater

caution when you need to drive in

bad weather. The cruise control

should not be used in these

conditions.

Always drive

slower than you would in dry

weather. It takes your car longer to

react, even in conditions that may

seem just barely damp. Apply

smooth, even pressure to all the

controls. Abrupt steering wheel

movements or sudden, hard appli-

cation of the brakes can cause loss of

control in wet weather. Be extra

cautious for the first few miles

(kilometers) of driving while you

adjust to the change in driving

conditions. This is especially true in

snow. A person can forget some

snow-driving techniques during the

summer months. Practice is needed

to relearn those skills. 111

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

VisibilityDriving Technique

192

01/06/02 17:15:51 31S5A610_195

Check your tires

frequently for wear and proper

pressure. Both are important in

preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of

traction on a wet surface). In the

winter, mount snow tires on all four

wheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,

they can change from moment to

moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-

pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have

patches of ice. Driving conditions

can be very hazardous when the

outside temperature is near freezing.

The road surface can become

covered with areas of water puddles

mixed with areas of ice, so your

traction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. If

traction is low, you can lock up the

drive wheels for a moment and cause

askid.

Be very cautious when passing, or

beingpassedbyothervehicles.The

spray from large vehicles reduces

your visibility, and the wind buffeting

can cause you to lose control.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a

trailer. Attempting to do so can void

your warranties.

Driving in Bad Weather, Towing a Trailer

Driving

Towing a TrailerTraction

193

01/06/02 17:16:00 31S5A610_196

194

01/06/02 17:16:03 31S5A610_197

This section also includes

Maintenance Schedules for normal

driving and severe driving conditions,

a Maintenance Record, and instruc-

tions for simple maintenance tasks

you may want to take care of

yourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-

form more complex maintenance

tasks on your Honda, you may want

to purchase the Service Manual. See

page for information on how to

obtain a copy, or see your Honda

dealer.

This section explains why it is

important to keep your car well

maintained and to follow basic

maintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 196

.Important Safety Precautions . 197

.................Maintenance Schedule . 198

...Required Maintenance Record . 205

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207

..............................Fluid Locations . 208

......................................Engine Oil . 209

..................................Adding Oil . 209

....................Recommended Oil . 209

..............................Synthetic Oil . 210

....................................Additives . 210

.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 211

.............................Cooling System . 213

............Adding Engine Coolant . 213

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 215

....................Windshield Washers . 219

.......................Transmission Fluid . 220

Automatic

.........................Transmission . 220

5-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 221

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 222

............................Brake System . 222

...........................Clutch System . 223

..............................Power Steering . 224

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225

....................................Hood Latch . 226

....................................Spark Plugs . 227

..............................Replacement . 227

............................Specifications . 229

...........................................Battery . 230

.................................Wiper Blades . 232

..............Air Conditioning System . 234

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

.....................................Drive Belts . 237

....................................Timing Belt . 237

...............................................Tires . 238

......................................Inflation . 238

Recommended Tire Pressures

...........for Normal Driving . 239

Tire Pressure Adjustment for

..........High Speed Driving . 239

..................................Inspection . 240

..............................Maintenance . 240

.............................Tire Rotation . 241

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 242

......................Wheels and Tires . 243

..........................Winter Driving . 243

.............................Snow Tires . 243

............................Tire Chains . 244

.............................................Lights . 245

.....................Headlight Aiming . 247

........................Replacing Bulbs . 247

...........................Storing Your Car . 256

311

Maintenance

195

01/06/02 17:16:10 31S5A610_198

Some of the most important safety

precautions are given here. However,

we cannot warn you of every

conceivable hazard that can arise in

performing maintenance. Only you

can decide whether or not you

should perform a given task.

This section includes instructions for

simple maintenance tasks, such as

checking and adding oil. Any service

items not detailed in this section

should be performed by a Honda

technician or other qualified

mechanic.

Regularly maintaining your car is the

best way to protect your investment.

Proper maintenance is essential to

your safety and the safety of your

passengers. It will also reward you

with more economical, trouble-free

driving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

196

Failure to properly follow

maintenance instructions and

precautions can cause you to

be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures

and precautions in this owner’s

manual.

Improperly maintaining this car

or failing to correct a problem

before driving can cause a

crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection

and maintenance

recommendations and

schedules in this owner’s

manual.

01/06/02 17:16:17 31S5A610_199

Be sure

there is adequate ventilation

whenever you operate the engine.

Let the

engine and exhaust system cool

before touching any parts.

not run the engine unless in-

structed to do so.

Read the instructions before you

begin, and make sure you have the

tools and skills required.

Before you begin any maintenance,

make sure your car is parked on

level ground and that the parking

brake is set. Also, be sure the engine

is off. This will help to eliminate

several potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection and

protective clothing when working

near the battery or when using

compressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire or

explosion, be careful when working

around gasoline or batteries. Use a

commercially available degreaser or

parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean

parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and

flames away from the battery and all

fuel-related parts.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoning

from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

197

01/06/02 17:16:26 31S5A610_200

The Maintenance Schedule specifies

how often you should have your car

serviced and what things need

attention. It is essential that you have

your car serviced as scheduled to

retain its high level of safety,

dependability, and emissions control

performance.

Avoidexceedingyourcar’sload

limit.Thisputsexcessstresson

the engine, brakes, and many

other parts of your car. The load

limit is shown on the label on the

driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonable

roads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over a

distance of several miles

(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline with

theproperoctanerating(seepage

The services and time or distance

intervals shown in the maintenance

schedule assume you will use your

car as normal transportation for

passengers and their possessions.

You should also follow these

recommendations:

Service your car according to the

time and mileage periods on one of

the Maintenance Schedules on the

following pages.

Follow the

Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Conditions if you drive your car

MAINLY under one or more of the

following conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)

per trip or, in freezing

temperatures, driving less than 10

miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over

90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods of

stop-and-go driving.

Driving with a roof rack, or driving

in mountainous conditions.164

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners

198

01/06/02 17:16:39 31S5A610_201

According to state and federal

regulations, failure to perform

maintenance on the items marked

with will not void your emissions

warranties. However, Honda

recommends that all maintenance

services be performed at the

recommended time or mileage

period to ensure long-term reliability.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-

iced roads.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY

or NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’

condition, you should follow the

Maintenance Schedule for Normal

Conditions.

Your authorized Honda dealer

knows your car best and can provide

competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is not

mandatory to keep your warranties

in effect. Maintenance may be done

by any qualified service facility or

person who is skilled in this type of

automotive service. Keep all the

receipts as proof of completion, and

have the person who does the work

fill out the Maintenance Record.

Check your warranty booklet for

more information.

U.S. Vehicles:

We recommend the use of genuine

Honda parts and fluids whenever you

have maintenance done. These are

manufactured to the same high-

quality standards as the original

components, so you can be confident

of their performance and durability.

Follow the

Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Conditions.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance, replacement or

repair of emissions control

devices and systems may be done

by any automotive repair

establishment or individual using

parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA

standards.

Canadian Owners

199

01/06/02 17:16:48 31S5A610_202

Maintenance

200

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

km x 1,000

months

112

110

176

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck engine oil and coolant

Replace engine oil

Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)

Replace engine oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Visually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Inspect and adjust drive belts

Replace dust and pollen filter

Replace transmission fluid

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugs

Inspect valve clearance

Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump

Inspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.

See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Service the following items at the recommended intervals

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,

then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 years

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

128

144

100

160

120

192

24 48 7212 36 60

235

199

M/T

A/T

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

01/06/02 17:17:11 31S5A610_203

Maintenance

201

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr

20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr

30,000 mi/48,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs

40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs

3yrs

50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs

60,000 mi/96,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs

80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs

90,000 mi/144,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km

6yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

Replace engine oil.

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 ).

Replace engine oil filter.

Inspect front and rear brakes.

Check parking brake adjustment.

Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.

Inspect suspension components.

Inspect driveshaft boots.

Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).

Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.

Replace dust and pollen filter .

Replace air cleaner element every 30,000 mi/48,000

km (independent of time).

Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of

mileage).

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do item in D.

Do items in A, C.

Do items in A, B.

Do item in E.

Do items in A.

Do item in D.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do item in D.

Do items in A, C.

Do items in A, B.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.

Replace spark plugs.

Do item in E.

Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.

Inspect idle speed.

Do item in D.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).

Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then

replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000mi/96,000km/5yrs.

198

See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement

information under special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last

column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

235

199

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/06/02 17:17:23 31S5A610_204

Maintenance

202

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

km x 1,000

months

Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

112

110

176

Check engine oil and coolant

Replace engine oil

Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)

Replace engine oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches

Visually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustment

Visually inspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody

Inspect and adjust drive belts

Replace dust and pollen filter

Replace transmission fluid

Replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugs

Inspect valve clearance

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump

Inspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

See Timing Belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,

then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km) or 7 years

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) in dusty conditions,

otherwise use normal schedule

Service the following items at the recommended intervals

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles

(48,000 km) or 2 years

128

144

100

160

120

192

24 48 7212 36 60

235

237

199

M/T

A/T

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

01/06/02 17:17:49 31S5A610_205

CONTINUED

Maintenance

203

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D, E, F

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

5,000 mi/8,000 km

10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr

15,000 mi/24,000 km

20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr

25,000 mi/40,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs

35,000 mi/56,000 km

40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs

45,000 mi/72,000 km

3ys

50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs

55,000 mi/88,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mi/104,000 km

70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs

75,000 mi/120,000 km

80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs

85,000 mi/136,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

Replace engine oil.

Replace engine oil filter.

Inspect front and rear brakes.

Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 ).

Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with

multipurpose grease.

Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.

Inspect suspension components.

Inspect driveshaft boots.

Check parking brake adjustment.

Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).

Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check

for leaks.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.

Inspect the underbody.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.

Replace dust and pollen filter .

Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/

24,000 km (independent of time).

Replace brake fluid every 3 years (independent of

mileage).

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A, E.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do item in E.

DoitemsinA,B,D.

Do items in A.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A, E.

Do item in F.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.

Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).

Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then

replace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Do items in A.

Do items in A, B.

Do items in A, E.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A.

Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).

DoitemsinA,B,D.

198

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/06/02 17:17:58 31S5A610_206

Maintenance

204

See Dust and Pollen Filter on page for replacement

information under special driving conditions.

See Timing Belt on page for replacement information under

special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last

column, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.

Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

235

237

199

95,000 mi/152,000 km

100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs

105,000 mi/168,000 km

6yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km/7 yrs

115,000 mi/184,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs

9yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

Do items in A.

DoitemsinA,B,C.

Do items in A, E.

Do item in F.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.

Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water

pump.

Inspect idle speed.

Do items in A.

Do item in E.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).

DoitemsinA,B,C,D.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).

Do item in F.

Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000mi/96,000km/5yrs.

Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)

01/06/02 17:18:07 31S5A610_207

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

205

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp

8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km

(or 1 year)

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km

(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

88,000 km

96,000 km

(or 3 years)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe

conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date Date

Date

202

200

01/06/02 17:18:18 31S5A610_208

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

206

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp

104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km

128,000 km

(or 4 years)

136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km

160,000 km

(or 5 years)

168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km

192,000 km

(or 6 years)

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date Date

Date

01/06/02 17:18:27 31S5A610_209

Engine oil level Check every

time you fill the fuel tank. See

page .

Engine coolant level Check the

radiator reserve tank every time

you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Check

the level in the reservoir monthly.

If weather conditions cause you to

use the washers frequently, check

the reservoir each time you stop

for fuel. See page .

Youshouldcheckthefollowing

items at the specified intervals. If

you are unsure of how to perform

any check, turn to the page given.

Lights Check the operation of

the headlights, parking lights,

taillights, high-mount brake light,

turn signals, brake lights, and

license plate lights monthly. See

page .

Tires Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for

wear and foreign objects. See page

Automatic transmission Check

the fluid level monthly. See page

Brakes Check the fluid level

monthly. See page .

168

169

219

220

222

238

245

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

207

01/06/02 17:18:37 31S5A610_210

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

208

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC

TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

FFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

((YYeellllooww lloooopp))

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD

((GGrraayy ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

FFIILLLL CCAAPP

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD

((BBlluuee ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

((OOrraannggee lloooopp))

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG

FFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))

EENNGGIINNEE

CCOOOOLLAANNTT

RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD

((MMaannuuaall

TTrraannssmmiissssiioonn oonnllyy))

((GGrraayy ccaapp))

01/06/02 17:18:42 31S5A610_211

To add oil, unscrew and remove the

engine oil fill cap on top of the valve

cover. Pour in the oil, and install the

engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.

Wait a few minutes and recheck the

oil level. Do not fill above the upper

mark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.

Always use a premium-grade 5W-20

detergent oil displaying the API

Certification Seal. This seal indicates

the oil is energy conserving, and that

it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Make sure the API Certification Seal

says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred

5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is

highly recommended that you use

Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for

optimum engine protection.

CONTINUED

Recommended OilAdding Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance

209

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

FFIILLLL CCAAPP

AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL

01/06/02 17:18:53 31S5A610_212

You may use a synthetic motor oil if

it meets the same requirements

given for a conventional motor oil: it

displays the API Certification Seal,

and it is the proper weight as shown

on the chart. When using synthetic

oil, you must follow the oil and filter

change intervals given in the

maintenance schedule.

Your Honda does not require any oil

additives. Additives may adversely

affect your engine’s or transmission’s

performance and durability.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-

round protection of your Honda, to

improve cold weather starting, and

to help your engine use less fuel.

If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30

oil may be used. However, it should

be replaced with 5W-20 at the next

oil change.

The oil’s viscosity or weight is

provided on the container’s label.

Select the oil for your vehicle

according to this chart.

Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Additives

210

AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree

01/06/02 17:19:02 31S5A610_213

Remove the oil filter and let the

remaining oil drain. A special

wrench (available from your

Honda dealer) is required to

remove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according to

instructions that come with it.

Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,

then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove the

engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil

drain bolt and washer from the

bottom of the engine. Drain the oil

into an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filter

accordingtothetimeanddistance

(miles/kilometers) recommenda-

tions in the maintenance schedule.

The oil and filter collect contami-

nants that can damage your engine if

they are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from

underneath the car. The car should

be raised on a service station-type

hydraulic lift for this service. Unless

you have the knowledge and proper

equipment, you should have this

maintenance done by a skilled

mechanic.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance

211

WWAASSHHEERR

OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR

DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

01/06/02 17:19:15 31S5A610_214

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt.

Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.

Start the engine. The oil pressure

indicator light should go out within

five seconds. If it does not, turn off

the engine and reinspect your

work.

Let the engine run for several

minutes and check the drain bolt

and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit for

several minutes, then check the oil

level. If necessary, add oil to bring

the level to the upper mark on the

dipstick.

Refill the engine with the recom-

mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity

(including filter):

(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)

(U.S.: EX)

(U.S.: DX, LX, Canada: DX, LX)

(U.S.: EX)

Engine Oil

Maintenance

212

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

3.4 US qt (3.2

, 2.8 Imp qt)

3.7 US qt (3.5

, 3.1 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can be

harmful to the environment. If you

change your own oil, please dispose of

the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed

container and take it to a recycling

center. Do not discard it in a trash bin

or dump it on the ground.

01/06/02 17:19:26 31S5A610_215

If the coolant level in the reserve

tank is at or below the MIN line, add

coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

This coolant should always be a

mixtureof50percentantifreezeand

50 percent water. Never add straight

antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completely

empty, you should also check the

coolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiator

are cool.

Always use Honda All Season

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This

coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent

antifreeze and 50 percent water. It

does not require any additional

mixing. If it is not available, you may

use another major-brand non-silicate

coolant as a temporary replacement.

Make sure it is a high-quality coolant

recommended for aluminum engines.

However, continued use of any non-

Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the cooling

system to malfunction or fail. Have

the cooling system flushed and

refilled with Honda antifreeze/

coolant as soon as possible. 1.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance

213

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

Removing the radiator cap

while the engine is hot can

cause the coolant to spray out,

seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before

removing the radiator cap.

01/06/02 17:19:35 31S5A610_216

Remove the radiator cap by

pushing down and turning

counterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-

clockwise, without pressing down

on it, until it stops. This relieves

any pressure remaining in the

cooling system.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX

and MIN marks. Put the cap back

on the reserve tank.

Put the radiator cap back on.

Tighten it fully.

The coolant level should be up to

the base of the filler neck. Add

coolant if it is low.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your car’s cooling

system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or engine compo-

nents.

Cooling System

Maintenance

214

RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP

RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK

01/06/02 17:19:46 31S5A610_217

CONTINUED

Remove the radiator cap.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn

the temperature control dial to

maximum heat. Turn off the

ignition. Open the hood. Make

sure the engine and radiator are

cool to the touch.

Draining the coolant requires access

to the underside of the car. Unless

you have the tools and knowledge,

you should have this maintenance

done by a skilled mechanic.

Thecoolingsystemshouldbe

completely drained and refilled with

new coolant according to the time

and distance recommendations in

the maintenance schedule. Only use

Honda All Season Antifreeze/

Coolant Type 2.

Loosen the drain plug on the

bottom of the radiator. The

coolant will drain through the

splash guard. Remove the drain

bolt and washer from the engine

block. Drain the coolant into an

appropriate container.

1. 3.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance

215

DDRRAAIINN

PPLLUUGG

DDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT

01/06/02 17:19:56 31S5A610_218

To remove the reserve tank to

drain the coolant, first remove the

battery.

Put the tube back in the clips and

put the reserve tank back in place,

making sure its bottom tab is in

the holder. Reinstall and tighten

the mounting bolt securely.

Reinstall the tray, battery, stay,

battery case, and battery plate in

the reverse order of removal.

Reinstall and tighten the bolt and

nut securely.

Reconnect the battery cables to

the terminals. Connect the positive

( ) cable first, then the negative

()cable.

Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds.

Disconnect the battery cables

from the terminals. Disconnect

the negative ( ) cable first, then

the positive ( ) cable.

Remove the bolt and the nut with

a wrench, and remove the battery

plate. Pull the bottom end of the

stay out of the hole, and remove

the stay and the battery cover.

Remove the battery and the tray.

Remove the reserve tank

mounting bolt with a wrench, then

remove the coolant tube from the

three clips. Remove the reserve

tank from its holder and drain the

coolant into an appropriate

container.

4. 6.

10.

Cooling System

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

216

BBOOLLTT

TTAABB

CCOOVVEERR

SSTTAAYY

BBOOLLTT

NNUUTT

PPLLAATTEE

01/06/02 17:20:09 31S5A610_219

CONTINUED

Pour Honda All Season

Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into

the radiator up to the base of the

filler neck. This coolant is a

mixture of 50 percent antifreeze

and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing

is not required.

The cooling system capacity is:

Tightening torque:

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,

then reinstall the drain bolt in the

engine block. Tighten it securely.

When the coolant stops draining,

tightenthedrainplugatthe

bottom of the radiator.

When the audio system disables

itself, the clock setting will cancel.

To reset the clock, refer to the

Digital Clock in the audio system’s

operation.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the audio system will

disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn

on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’

in the frequency display. Use the

Preset buttons to enter the five-digit

code (see page ).

12.

11.

13.

157

With 5-speed manual transmission:

With automatic transmission:

On the U.S. EX, and Canadian LX and

DX-GOP models

Cooling System

Maintenance

217

FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKK

FFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree

1.06 US gal (4.0 , 0.88 Imp gal)

1.03 US gal (3.9

, 0.86 Imp gal)

58 lbf·ft (78 N·m , 8.0 kgf·m)

01/06/02 17:20:23 31S5A610_220

Start the engine and hold it at

1,500 rpm until the radiator fan

comes on. Turn off the engine.

Check the coolant level in the

radiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, and

tighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tank

to the MAX mark. Install the

reserve tank cap.

Start the engine and let it run for

about 30 seconds. Then turn off

the engine.

Check the level in the radiator,

add coolant if needed.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAX

mark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, and

tighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run until

the radiator cooling fan comes on

at least twice. Then stop the

engine.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill the

radiator with coolant up to the

base of the filler neck.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Cooling System

Maintenance

218

01/06/02 17:20:34 31S5A610_221

Check the level in the windshield

washer reservoir at least monthly

during normal usage. In bad weather,

when you use the washers often,

check the level every time you stop

for fuel.

When you refill the reservoir, clean

the edges of the windshield wiper

blades with windshield washer fluid

on a clean cloth. This will help to

condition the blade edges.

The windshield washer reservoir is

located behind the driver’s side

headlight. Check the reservoir’s fluid

level by removing the cap and

looking at the level gauge attached

to the cap.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality

windshield washer fluid. This

increases the cleaning capability and

prevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washer level indicator will

light when the level is low (see page

).63

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

219

LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWAASSHHEERR RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR

Do not use engine antifreeze or a

vinegar/water solution in the

windshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your car’s paint,

while a vinegar/water solution can

damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-available

windshield washer fluid.

01/06/02 17:20:44 31S5A610_222

Insert the dipstick all the way into

the transmission securely as

shown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be

between the upper and lower

marks.

Check the fluid level with the engine

at normal operating temperature.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission and wipe it

with a clean cloth.

Park the car on level ground. Shut

off the engine.

If the level is below the lower

mark, add fluid into the filler hole

to bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1

(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If

it is not available, you may use a

DEXRON

III automatic

transmission fluid as a temporary

replacement. However, continued

use can affect shift quality. Have

the transmission flushed and

refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as

soon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the

transmission, the technician

should drain and refill it with

Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the

vehicle a short distance. Do this

three times. Then drain and refill

the transmission a final time.

Automatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

220

DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK

UUPPPPEERR

MMAARRKK

LLOOWWEERR

MMAARRKK

01/06/02 17:20:57 31S5A610_223

If Honda MTF is not available, you

may use an API service SG, SH or SJ

grade motor oil with a viscosity of

SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 as a

temporary replacement. An SG

grade is preferred, but an SH or SJ

grade may be used if SG is not

available. However, motor oil does

not contain the proper additives and

continued use can cause stiffer

shifting. Replace as soon as it is

convenient.

The transmission should be drained

and refilled with new fluid according

to the time and distance recommen-

dations in the maintenance schedule.

Insert the dipstick all the way back

into the transmission securely as

shown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drained

and refilled with new fluid according

to the time and distance recommen-

dations in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with the

transmission at normal operating

temperature and the car sitting on

level ground. Remove the

transmission filler bolt and carefully

feel inside the bolt hole with your

finger. The fluid level should be up

to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is

not, add Honda Manual Transmis-

sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts to

run out of the hole. Reinstall the

filler bolt and tighten it securely.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

5-speed Manual Transmission

221

FFIILLLLEERR BBOOLLTT

CCoorrrreecctt LLeevveell

01/06/02 17:21:06 31S5A610_224

The fluid level should be between

theMINandMAXmarksontheside

of the reservoir. If the level is at or

below the MIN mark, your brake

system needs attention. Have the

brake system inspected for leaks or

worn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy Duty

Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not

available, you should use only DOT 3

or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed

container, as a temporary

replacement. However, the use of

any non-Honda brake fluid can cause

corrosion and decrease the life of the

system. Have the brake system

flushed and refilled with Honda

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as

soon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-

voirs monthly. There are up to two

reservoirs, depending on the model.

They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)

Clutch fluid reservoir

(manual transmission only)

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your car’s braking

system and can cause extensive

damage.

The brake fluid should be replaced

according to the time recommenda-

tion in the maintenance schedule.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

Brake System

222

MMAAXX

MMIINN

01/06/02 17:21:16 31S5A610_225

The fluid should be between the

MIN and MAX marks on the side of

the reservoir. If it is not, add brake

fluid to bring it up to that level. Use

the same fluid specified for the

brake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak in

the clutch system. Have this system

inspected as soon as possible.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

Clutch System

223

MMAAXX

MMIINN

01/06/02 17:21:22 31S5A610_226

A low power steering fluid level can

indicate a leak in the system. Check

the fluid level frequently and have

the system inspected as soon as

possible.

Always use Honda Power Steering

Fluid. If it is not available, you may

use another power steering fluid as

an emergency replacement.

However, continued use can cause

increased wear and poor steering in

cold weather. Have the power

steering system flushed and refilled

with Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine is

cold. Look at the side of the

reservoir. The fluid should be

between the UPPER LEVEL and

LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the

LOWER LEVEL, add power steering

fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Power Steering

Maintenance

224

UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL

LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL

Turning the steering wheel to full lef t

or right lock and holding it there can

damage the power steering pump.

01/06/02 17:21:30 31S5A610_227

Carefully clean the inside of the

air cleaner housing with a damp

rag.

Place the new air cleaner element

in the air cleaner housing.

The air cleaner element is inside the

air cleaner housing in the engine

compartment.

To replace it:

Loosen the seven bolts and

remove the air cleaner housing

cover.

Remove the old air cleaner

element. Reinstall the air cleaner housing

cover, tighten the seven bolts.

The air cleaner element should be

replaced according to the distance

recommendation in the maintenance

schedule.

Replacement

Maintenance

Air Cleaner Element

225

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR EELLEEMMEENNTT

BBOOLLTTSS

01/06/02 17:21:41 31S5A610_228

Clean the hood latch assembly with a

mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a

multipurpose grease. Lubricate all

the moving parts (as shown),

including the pivot. Follow the time

and distance recommendations in

the Maintenance Schedule. If you

are not sure how to clean and grease

the latch, contact your Honda dealer.

Maintenance

Hood Latch

226

PPIIVVOOTTSS

LLAATTCCHH

AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY

01/06/02 17:21:46 31S5A610_229

Disconnect the wire connector

from the ignition coil by pushing

on the lock tab and pulling on the

connector. Pull on the plastic

connector, not the wires.

Loosen the two holding clips by

turning the heads one-quarter turn

counterclockwise with a flat-tipped

screwdriver. Remove the cover by

pulling it straight up.

The spark plugs in your car are a

special platinum-tipped design for

longer life. The spark plugs should

be replaced according to the

distance recommendation in the

maintenance schedule.

Clean up any dirt and oil that have

collected around the ignition coils.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Replacement

227

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR LLOOCCKK TTAABBHHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPPSS

IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL

01/06/02 17:21:55 31S5A610_230

Put the new spark plug into the

socket; then screw it into the hole.

Screw it in by hand so you do not

crossthread it.

Torque the spark plug. (If you do

not have a torque wrench, tighten

the spark plug two-thirds of a turn

after it contacts the cylinder head.)

Tightening torque:

Remove the spark plug with

a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark

plug socket.

Use a wrench to remove the nut

holding the ignition coil. Remove

the ignition coil by pulling it

straight out.

6. 7.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

228

NNUUTT

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

01/06/02 17:22:05 31S5A610_231

Spark Plug Gap:

Push the wire connector onto the

ignition coil. Make sure it locks in

place.

Repeat this procedure for the

other three spark plugs.

Install the ignition coil. Reinstall

the nut.

Reinstall the cover. Secure the

cover by turning the heads of the

two holding clips one-quarter turn

clockwise with a flat-tipped

screwdriver.

NGK:

DENSO:

11.

10.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

Specifications:

229

PZFR6F-11

PKJ20CR-M11

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

0.1 mm

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A

spark plug that is too loose can

overheat and damage the engine.

Overtightening can cause damage to

the threads in the cylinder head.

01/06/02 17:22:16 31S5A610_232

Check the battery terminals for

corrosion (a white or yellowish

powder). To remove it, cover the

terminals with a solution of baking

soda and water. It will bubble up and

turn brown. When this stops, wash it

off with plain water. Dry off the

battery with a cloth or paper towel.

Coat the terminals with grease to

help prevent future corrosion.

Check the battery condition by

looking at the test indicator window

on the battery.

The label on the battery explains the

test indicator’s colors.

Check the condition of your car’s

battery monthly. You should check

the color of the test indicator window,

and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds.

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

230

TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW

01/06/02 17:22:24 31S5A610_233

If the terminals are severely cor-

roded, clean them with baking soda

and water. Then use a wrench to

loosen and remove the cables from

the terminals. Always disconnect the

negative ( ) cable first and recon-

nect it last. Clean the battery termi-

nals with a terminal cleaning tool or

wire brush. Reconnect and tighten

the cables, then coat the terminals

with grease.

If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to

prevent damage to the car’s

electrical system.

If your car’s battery is disconnected

or goes dead, the audio system will

disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn

on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’

in the frequency display. Use the

Preset buttons to enter the five-digit

code (see page ).

When the battery is disconnected,

the clock setting in the audio system

will be canceled. You will need reset

the clock according to the

instructions of the audio system.

157

On all models

On the U.S. EX, and Canadian LX and

DX-GOP models

Battery

Maintenance

231

The battery gives off explosive

hydrogen gas during normal

operation.

A spark or flame can cause the

battery to explode with enough

force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a

face shield, or have a skilled

mechanic do the battery

maintenance.

Charging the battery with the cables

connected can seriously damage your

car’s electronic controls. Detach the

battery cables before connecting the

battery to a charger.

01/06/02 17:22:34 31S5A610_234

Disconnect the blade assembly

fromthewiperarmbypushingin

the lock tab. Hold it in while you

push the blade assembly toward

thebaseofthearm.

Raise the wiper arm off the

windshield.

To replace the blade:

Check the condition of the wiper

blades at least every six months.

Look for signs of cracking in the

rubber, or areas that are getting

hard. Replace the blades if you find

these signs, or they leave streaks

and unwiped areas when used.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

232

WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS

LLOOCCKK TTAABB

01/06/02 17:22:42 31S5A610_235

Remove the blade from its holder

by grasping the tabbed end of the

blade. Pull firmly until the tabs

come out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. If

they have no plastic or metal rein-

forcement along the back edge,

remove the metal reinforcement

strips from the old wiper blade and

install them in the slots along the

edge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into the

holder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it

locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield.

3. 4.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

233

BBLLAADDEE

RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT

01/06/02 17:22:52 31S5A610_236

Periodically check the engine’s

radiator and air conditioning

condenser for leaves, insects, and

dirt stuck to the front surface. These

block the air flow and reduce cooling

efficiency. Use a light spray from a

hose or a soft brush to remove them.

If the air conditioning does not get as

cold as before, have your dealer

check the system. Recharge the

system with Refrigerant HFC-134a

(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

Run the air conditioning at least once

a week during the cold weather

months. Run it for at least ten

minutes while you are driving at a

steady speed with the engine at

normal operating temperature. This

circulates the lubricating oil con-

tained in the refrigerant.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed

system. Any major maintenance,

such as recharging, should be done

by a qualified mechanic. You can do

a couple of things to make sure the

air conditioning works efficiently.

297

Standard for LX and EX models in

the U.S., and DX-GOP and

LX models in Canada

Optional for other models

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance

234

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR

Whenever you have the air conditioning

system serviced, make sure the service

f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling

system. This system captures the

ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing

refrigerant into the atmosphere can

damage the environment.

The condenser and radiator fins bend

easily. Only use a low-pressure spray

or soft-bristle brush to clean them.

01/06/02 17:23:01 31S5A610_237

To replace it:

Open the glove box. Remove the

hooks on the side panels by pulling

out on the tabs. Pivot the glove

box out of the way.

The dust and pollen filter removes

pollen and dust that is brought in

from the outside through the heating

andcoolingsystem.

This filter should be replaced every

30,000 miles (48,000 km) under

normal conditions. It should be

replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000

km) if you drive primarily in urban

areas that have high concentrations

of soot in the air from industry and

diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it

more often if air flow from the

heating and cooling system becomes

less than usual.

The dust and pollen filter is located

behind the glove box.

Remove the dust and pollen filter

cover by pushing in on the lock tab,

then pulling the cover toward you.

CONTINUED

Standard for LX and EX models in

the U.S., and LX and DX-GOP models in

Canada

Optional for other models

Maintenance

Replacement

Dust and Pollen Filter

235

HHOOOOKKSS

TTAABB

CCOOVVEERR

01/06/02 17:23:13 31S5A610_238

Remove the first filter by pulling it

straight out of the air conditioning

unit. Remove the second filter by

sliding it to the left, then pulling it

out.

Install the new filters. Reinstall the

cover.

Pivot the glove box up into

position. Reinstall the hooks into

thesidepaneloftheglovebox.

Close the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replace

the dust and pollen filters, have them

replaced by your Honda dealer.

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

236

DDUUSSTT AANNDD PPOOLLLLEENN FFIILLTTEERRSS

01/06/02 17:23:21 31S5A610_239

The belts should have the following

‘‘play’’ or deflection. The timing belt should normally be

replaced at the intervals shown in

the maintenance schedule.

In very high temperatures

(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures

(under 20°F, 29°C).

Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)

or 100,000 km (Canada) if you

regularly drive your car in one or

more of these conditions:

Power steering belt:

Alternator belt:

Check the condition of the two drive

belts. Examine the edges of each

belt for cracks or fraying.

If you see signs of wear or looseness,

have your dealer adjust or replace

the belts.

Check the tension of each belt by

pushingonitwithyourthumb

midway between the pulleys.

Drive Belts Timing Belt

Drive Belts, Timing Belt

Maintenance

237

AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT

PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT

0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)

0.33 0.43 in (8.5 11.0 mm)

01/06/02 17:23:33 31S5A610_240

We recommend that you visually

check your tires every day. If you

think a tire might be low, check it

immediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your car, your tires

must be the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread,

and correctly inflated. The following

pages give more detailed information

on how and when to check air

pressure, how to inspect your tires

for damage and wear, and what to do

when your tires need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflated

provides the best combination of

handling, tread life and riding

comfort. Underinflated tires wear

unevenly, adversely affect handling

and fuel economy, and are more

likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your car

ride more harshly, are more prone to

damage from road hazards, and wear

unevenly.

Use a gauge to measure the air

pressure at least once a month. Even

tires that are in good condition may

lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1

to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.

Remember to check the spare tire at

thesametimeyoucheckallthe

other tires.

Check the pressure in the tires when

they are cold. This means the car

has been parked for at least three

hours. If you have to drive the car

before checking the tire pressure,

the tires can still be considered

‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when the

tires are hot (the car has been driven

several miles), you will see readings

4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4

kgf/cm ) higher than the cold

reading. This is normal. Do not let

air out to match the specified cold

pressure. The tire will be

underinflated.

Youshouldgetyourowntire

pressure gauge and use it whenever

you check your tire pressures. This

will make it easier for you to tell if a

pressure loss is due to a tire problem

and not due to a variation between

gauges.

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance

238

Using tires that are excessively

worn or improperly inflated can

cause a crash in which you can

be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this

owner’s manual regarding tire

inflation and maintenance.

01/06/02 17:23:44 31S5A610_241

The following chart shows the

recommended cold tire pressures for

most normal driving conditions and

speeds.

These pressures are also given on

thetireinformationlabelonthe

driver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability to

self-seal if they are punctured.

However, because leakage is often

very slow, you should look closely

for punctures if a tire starts losing

pressure.

Honda strongly recommends that

you not drive faster than posted

speed limits and conditions allow. If

you decide it is safe to drive at high

speeds, be sure to adjust the cold tire

pressuresasshowninthenext

column. If you do not adjust the tire

pressure, excessive heat can build up

and cause sudden tire failure.

When you return to normal speed

driving, be sure to readjust the tire

pressure for normal driving. You

should wait until the tires are cold

before adjusting the tire pressure.

Tire Pressures for high speed

driving are the same as for normal

driving.

Thecompactsparetirepressureis:

(DX, U.S. LX)

(EX, Canadian LX)

Cold Tire Pressure

for Speeds over 100

mph (160 km/h)

Tire Size

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

DX and U.S. LX models only EX and Canadian LX models only

Tires

Maintenance

Recommended Tire Pressures for

Normal Driving

Tire Pressure Adjustment for High

Speed Driving

239

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4

kgf/cm

)

P185/70R14 87S

P185/70R14 87S 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1

kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1

kgf/cm )

P185/65R15 86H

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/06/02 17:24:00 31S5A610_242

Every time you check inflation, you

should also examine the tires for

damage, foreign objects, and wear.

Youshouldlookfor:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or

side of the tire. Replace the tire if

youfindeitheroftheseconditions.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,

correct wheel alignment helps to

decrease tire wear. If you find a tire

is worn unevenly, have your dealer

check the wheel alignment.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side

of the tire. Replace the tire if you

can see fabric or cord.

The tires were properly balanced by

the factory. They may need to be

rebalanced at some time before they

are worn out. Have your dealer

check the tires if you feel a consis-

tent vibration while driving. A tire

should always be rebalanced if it is

removed from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicators

molded into the tread. When the

tread wears down to that point, you

will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide

band running across the tread. This

shows there is less than 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A

tire that is this worn gives very little

traction on wet roads. You should

replace the tire if you can see the

tread wear indicator in three or more

places around the tire.

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance

240

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:24:14 31S5A610_243

When shopping for replacement

tires, you may find that some tires

are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they

are designed to rotate only in one

direction. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-

back.

Make sure the installer balances the

wheels when you have new tires

installed. This increases riding

comfort and tire life. Your car’s

original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’

balanced at the factory. For best

results, have the installer perform a

dynamic balance.

To help increase tire life and

distribute wear more evenly, you

should have the tires rotated every

10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move the

tires to the positions shown in the

chart each time they are rotated.

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

241

((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaall

TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaall

TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))

FFrroonntt FFrroonntt

01/06/02 17:24:21 31S5A610_244

The tires that came with your car

were selected to match the perform-

ance capabilities of the car while

providing the best combination of

handling, ride comfort, and long life.

Youshouldreplacethemwithradial

tires of the same size, load range,

speed rating, and maximum cold tire

pressure rating (as shown on the

tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and

bias-ply tires on your car can reduce

its braking ability, traction, and

steering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at

thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible

or necessary, then replace the two

front tires or the two rear tires as a

pair. Replacing just one tire can

seriously affect your car’s handling.

TheABSworksbycomparingthe

speed of the wheels. When replacing

tires, use the same size originally

supplied with the car. Tire size and

construction can affect wheel speed

and may cause the system to work

inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,

make sure the wheel’s specifications

match those of the original wheel

that came on your car. Replacement

wheels are available at your Honda

dealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance

242

Installing improper tires on your

car can affect handling and

stability. This can cause a crash

in which you can be seriously

hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of

tires recommended in this

owner’s manual.

01/06/02 17:24:30 31S5A610_245

Wheels:

Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or

‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an

all-weather tread design. They

should be suitable for most winter

driving conditions. Tires without

these markings are designed for

optimum traction in dry conditions.

They may not provide adequate

performance in winter driving.

For the best performance in snowy

or icy conditions, you should install

snow tires or tire chains. They may

be required by local laws under

certain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on your

Honda, make sure they are radial

tires of the same size and load range

as the original tires. Mount snow

tiresonallfourwheelstobalance

your car’s handling in all weather

conditions. Keep in mind the traction

provided by snow tires on dry roads

may not be as high as your car’s

original equipment tires. You should

drive cautiously even when the roads

areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer

for maximum speed recommenda-

tions.

Tires:

See page for information about

DOT Tire Quality Grading.

(DX, U.S. LX)

(EX, Canadian LX)

298

(EX, Canadian LX)

CONTINUED

Snow Tires

Wheels and Tires Winter Driving

Tires

Maintenance

243

14x51/2JJ

P185/70R14 87S

P185/65R15 86H

15x6JJ

01/06/02 17:24:42 31S5A610_246

Because your Honda has limited tire

clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’

cable-type traction devices on the

front tires. Use traction devices only

when required by driving conditions

or local laws. Make sure they are the

correct size for your tires.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not

be used. No matter how tight they

seem to be installed, they can come

into contact with the body and

suspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions and

mount them as tightly as you can.

Drive slowly with them installed. If

youhearthemcomingincontact

with the body or chassis, stop and

investigate. Make sure the cables are

installed tightly, and that they are

not contacting the brake lines or

suspension.

Remove them as soon as you begin

driving on cleared roads.

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Chains

244

Traction devices that are the wrong

size or improperly installed can

damage your vehicle’s brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop

driving if they are hitting any part of

the vehicle.

01/06/02 17:24:49 31S5A610_247

Check the operation of your car’s

exterior lights at least once a month.

A burned out bulb can create an

unsafe condition by reducing your

car’s visibility and the ability to

signal your intentions to other

drivers.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

245

HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT

PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR

01/06/02 17:24:55 31S5A610_248

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)

Parking lights

Taillights

Brake lights

High-mount brake light

Turn signals

Back-up lights

Hazard light function

License plate light

Side marker lights

Daytime running lights

(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,

replace them as soon as possible.

Refer to the chart on page to

determine what type of replacement

bulb is needed.

297

Lights

Maintenance

246

BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT

LLIICCEENNSSEE

PPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTTSS

TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT

HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT

BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT

SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT//

RREEAARR SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT

TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT

01/06/02 17:25:02 31S5A610_249

Open the hood.

If you need to change the head-

light bulb on the driver’s side,

remove the power steering

reservoir tank by pulling it out of

its holder.

Your car has halogen headlight

bulbs, one on each side. When

replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel

base and protect the glass from

contactwithyourskinorhard

objects. If you touch the glass, clean

it with denatured alcohol and a clean

cloth.

Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed

when your car was new. If you

regularly carry heavy items in the

trunk, readjustment may be required.

Adjustment of the headlights should

be performed by a Honda technician

or other qualified mechanic.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance

247

HHOOLLDDEERR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot

when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch

on the glass can cause the bulb to

overheat and shatter.

01/06/02 17:25:13 31S5A610_250

If you are changing the bulb on

the driver’s side, start the engine,

turn the steering wheel all the way

to the right, and turn off the

engine. If you are changing the

bulb on the passenger’s side, turn

the steering wheel to the left.

Reinstall the power steering

reservoir.

(Driver’s side)

Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,

making sure the tabs are in their

slots. Pivot the hold-down wire

back in place and clip the end into

the slot.

Install the rubber seal over the

back of the headlight assembly.

Make sure it is right side up; it is

marked ‘‘TOP.’’

Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pulling the

connector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather seal

by pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-down

wire from its slot. Pivot it out of

the way and remove the bulb.

Push the electrical connector onto

the new bulb. Make sure it is

connected securely.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Front Side Marker/

Turn Signal and Parking Light

Bulbs

248

WWEEAATTHHEERR SSEEAALL BBUULLBB

CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR HHOOLLDD--DDOOWWNN WWIIRREE

01/06/02 17:25:27 31S5A610_251

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the holding clip from the

inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover back.

Remove the socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.

Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it

clockwise to lock it in place.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the holding clip. Lock it in

place by pushing on the center.

2. 4.

Lights

Maintenance

249

HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP

01/06/02 17:25:39 31S5A610_252

Open the trunk. Determine which of the two bulbs

is burned out: stop/taillight/side

marker light or turn signal light.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.

Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the light

assembly by turning it clockwise

until it locks.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Make

sure it is installed under the edge

of the trunk seal.

Remove the screws in the center

of each of the two fasteners on the

side of the trunk lining. Pull the

lining back.

Put the fasteners into the holes on

the side of the trunk lining.

Reinstall the screws.

1. 2.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Fenders)

Lights

Maintenance

250

FFAASSTTEENNEERRSS

01/06/02 17:25:54 31S5A610_253

Open the trunk and remove the

socket from the light assembly by

turning it one-quarter turn counter-

clockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.

Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket.

Push the new bulb straight into

the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into the

light assembly. Turn it clockwise

to lock it in place.

Testthelightstomakesurethe

new bulb is working.

Open the trunk.

Determine which of the two bulbs

is burned out: taillight or back-up

light.

Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a High-mount Brake

Light Bulb

Replacing Rear Bulbs

(in Trunk Lid)

251

01/06/02 17:26:09 31S5A610_254

Turn on the parking lights and

check that the new bulb is

working.

Reinstall the socket. Turn it

clockwise until it locks. Make sure

the new bulb is working.

Reinstall the socket back in place

by pushing it in until it latches.

Open the trunk.

Remove the socket from the light

assembly by squeezing the tabs on

both sides of the socket.

Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket. Push the new bulb in until

it bottoms in the socket.

3. 4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Rear License Plate

Bulb

252

01/06/02 17:26:20 31S5A610_255

Pull the bulb straight out of the

holder. Push the new bulb straight

into the holder until it bottoms.

Put the light assembly back into

the hole, right side first. Push on

the left side until it snaps into

place.

Open the trunk.

Put a cloth on the left side edge of

the trunk light assembly. Remove

the trunk light assembly by using

a small flat-tipped screwdriver to

pry carefully on the left edge of

the assembly.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

253

01/06/02 17:26:30 31S5A610_256

Although the ceiling light and

spotlights come apart the same way,

theydonotusethesametypeof

bulbs.

Removethelensbycarefully

prying on the edge of the lens with

a fingernail file or a small flat-tip

screwdriver. Do not pry on the

edge of the housing around the

lens.

Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metal

tabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Front ceiling light:

Pry on the front edge of the lens in

the middle.

Ceiling light:

Pry on the side edge of the lens in

the middle.

Replacing Bulbs in the Interior

Lights

Maintenance

254

CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT FFRROONNTT CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT

EEXX

01/06/02 17:26:41 31S5A610_257

Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out of the bulb holder.

Push the new bulb into the bulb

holder.

Reinstall the lens by inserting the

outside edge first, then pushing on

the inside edge.

Check which bulb is burned out.

Push on the lens of the opposite

side you are replacing.

Remove the lens of the burned out

bulb by carefully prying on the

edge between the lenses with a

fingernail file or a small flat-tipped

screwdriver.

On LX model

Lights

Maintenance

255

PPuusshh

SSPPOOTT LLIIGGHHTTSS

LLXX

01/06/02 17:26:51 31S5A610_258

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter

(see page ).

Wash and dry the exterior

completely.

Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe

carpeting, floor mats, etc. are

completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put

the transmission in Reverse

(5-speed manual) or Park

(automatic).

If you need to park your car for an

extended period (more than one

month), there are several things you

should do to prepare it for storage.

Proper preparation helps prevent

deterioration and makes it easier to

get your car back on the road. If

possible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for a

longer period, it should be

supported on jackstands so the

tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if

the car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade

arms with a folded towel or rag so

they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a

silicone spray lubricant to all door

and trunk seals. Also, apply a

vehiclebodywaxtothepainted

surfaces that mate with the door

and trunk seals.

Coverthecarwitha‘‘breathable’’

cover, one made from a porous

material such as cotton.

Nonporous materials, such as

plastic sheeting, trap moisture,

which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for a

while periodically (preferably once

amonth).

If you store your car for 12 months

or longer, have your Honda dealer

perform the inspections called for in

the 24 months maintenance schedule

(Normal Conditions) as soon as you

take it out of storage (see page ).

The replacements called for in the

maintenance schedule are not

needed unless the car has actually

reached that time or mileage.

211

200

Storing Your Car

Maintenance

256

01/06/02 17:27:05 31S5A610_259

Regular cleaning and polishing of

your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’

looking. This section gives you hints

on how to clean your car and

preserve its appearance: the paint,

brightwork, wheels and interior. Also

included are several things you can

do to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 258

.....................................Washing . 258

.......................................Waxing . 259

..........................Paint Touch-up . 259

..................................Interior Care . 260

...................................Carpeting . 260

.................................Floor Mats . 260

.........................................Fabric . 261

...........................................Vinyl . 261

...................................Seat Belts . 261

....................................Windows . 262

..........................Air Fresheners . 262

....................Corrosion Protection . 263

.................................Body Repairs . 264

Appearance Care

257

01/06/02 17:27:10 31S5A610_260

When you have washed and rinsed

the whole exterior, dry it with a

chamois or soft towel. Letting it

air-dry will cause dulling and water

spots.

Only use the solvents and cleaners

recommendedinthisOwner’s

Manual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix

in a mild detergent, such as

dishwashing liquid or a product

made especially for car washing.

Frequent washing helps preserve

your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can

scratch the paint, while tree sap and

bird droppings can permanently ruin

the finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not in

direct sunlight. If the car is parked in

the sun, move it into the shade and

let the exterior cool down before you

start.

Rinse the car thoroughly with cool

water to remove loose dirt.

Wash the car using the water and

detergent solution and a soft-

bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.

Start at the top and work your way

down. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, tree

sap, etc. Remove these stains with

tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it

off immediately so it does not

harm the finish. Remember to re-

wax these areas, even if the rest of

the car does not need waxing.

As you dry the car, inspect it for

chips and scratches that could allow

corrosion to start. Repair them with

touch-up paint (see page ).259

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

258

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners

can damage the paint, metal, and

plastic on your car.

01/06/02 17:27:22 31S5A610_261

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/

waxes can restore the shine to paint

that has oxidized and lost some of its

shine. They normally contain mild

abrasives and solvents that remove

the top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda if

the finish does not have its original

shine after using a wax.

Always wash and dry the whole car

before waxing it. You should wax

your car, including the metal trim,

whenever water sits on the surface

in large patches. It should form into

beads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with

removers also takes off the wax.

Remember to re-wax those areas,

even if the rest of the car does not

need waxing.

Your dealer has touch-up paint to

match your car’s color. The color

code is printed on a sticker on the

driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to

your dealer so you are sure to get

the correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chips

or scratches in the paint. Repair

them right away to prevent corrosion

of the metal underneath. Use the

touch-up paint only on small chips

and scratches. More extensive paint

damage should be repaired by a

professional.

You should use a quality liquid or

paste wax. Apply it according to the

instructions on the container. In

general, there are two types of

products:

Waxes A wax coats the finish and

protects it from damage by exposure

to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You

should use a wax on your Honda

when it is new.

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing Paint Touch-up

259

01/06/02 17:27:33 31S5A610_262

Vacuum the carpeting frequently to

remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make

the carpet wear out faster.

Periodically shampoo the carpet to

keep it looking new. Use one of the

foam-type carpet cleaners on the

market. Follow the instructions that

come with the cleaner, applying it

with a sponge or soft brush. Keep

the carpeting as dry as possible by

not adding water to the foam.

If you replace it, use a genuine

Honda floor mat that is designed to

be used with the floor mat anchor in

your car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat in

the driver’s footwell, make sure it

fits properly and that it can be used

with the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats on

top of the anchored mat, otherwise

the additional mats may slide

forward and interfere with the pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, make

sure to re-anchor it when you put it

back in your car.

The genuine Honda driver’s floor

mat was designed to hook over the

floor mat anchor. This keeps the

floor mat from sliding forward and

possibly interfering with the pedals.

If equipped

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

260

01/06/02 17:27:44 31S5A610_263

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat

belt anchors can cause the belts to

retract slowly. Wipe the insides of

the loops with a clean cloth

dampened in mild soap and warm

water or isopropyl alcohol.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of the

material frequently. For general

cleaning, use a solution of mild soap

and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.

To clean off stubborn spots, use a

commercially-available fabric cleaner.

Test it on a hidden area of the fabric

first, to make sure it does not bleach

or stain the fabric. Follow the

instructions that come with the

cleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum

cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft

cloth dampened in a solution of mild

soap and water. Use the same

solution with a soft-bristle brush on

more difficult spots. You can also use

commercially-available spray or

foam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you can

use a soft brush with a mixture of

mild soap and warm water to clean

them. Do not use bleach, dye, or

cleaning solvents. They can weaken

the belt material. Let the belts air-

drybeforeyouusethecar.

Fabric

Vinyl

Seat Belts

Interior Care

Appearance Care

261

LLOOOOPP

01/06/02 17:27:52 31S5A610_264

Clean the windows, inside and out,

with a commercially-available glass

cleaner. You can also use a mixture

of one part white vinegar to ten parts

water. This will remove the haze that

builds up on the inside of the

windows. Use a soft cloth or paper

towels to clean all glass and clear

plastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,

make sure you fasten it securely so it

does not spill as you drive.

If you want to use an air freshener/

deodorizer in the interior of your car,

it is best to use a solid type. Some

liquid air fresheners contain chemi-

cals that may cause parts of the

interior trim and fabric to crack or

discolor.

Windows Air Fresheners

Interior Care

Appearance Care

262

The rear window defogger and

antenna wires are bonded to the inside

of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-

down can dislodge and break these

wires. When cleaning the rear window,

use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-

side.

01/06/02 17:28:00 31S5A610_265

Two factors normally contribute to

causing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.

Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin

hollows on the underside of the

car stays damp, promoting

corrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protective

coatings from the exterior and

underside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measures

are built into your Honda. You can

help keep your car from corroding

by performing some simple periodic

maintenance:

Repair chips and scratches in the

paint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drain

holes in the bottom of the doors

and body.

Check the floor coverings for

dampness. Carpeting and floor

mats may remain damp for a long

time, especially in winter. This

dampness can eventually cause

the floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to clean

the underside of your car. This is

especially important in areas that

useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa

good idea in humid climates and

areas subject to salt air. Cars

equipped with ABS have a sensor

and wiring at each wheel. Be

careful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventive

coatings on the underside of your

car inspected and repaired

periodically.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care

263

01/06/02 17:28:10 31S5A610_266

When reporting your collision to the

insurance company, tell them you

want genuine Honda parts used in

the repair. Although most insurers

recognize the quality of original

parts, some may try to specify that

the repairs be done with other

available parts. You should investi-

gate this before any repairs have

begun.

Takeyourcartoyourauthorized

Honda dealer for inspection after the

repairs are completed. Your dealer

can make sure that quality materials

were used, and that corrosion-

preventive coatings were applied to

all repaired and replaced parts.

Body repairs can affect your car’s

resistance to corrosion. If your car

needs repairs after a collision, pay

close attention to the parts used in

the repair and the quality of the

work.

Make sure the repair facility uses

genuine Honda replacement body

parts. Some companies make sheet

metal pieces that seem to duplicate

the original Honda body parts, but

are actually inferior in fit, finish, and

corrosion resistance. Once installed,

they do not give the same high-

quality appearance.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care

264

01/06/02 17:28:17 31S5A610_267

This section covers the more-

common problems that motorists

experience with their vehicles. It

gives you information about how to

safely evaluate the problem and what

to do to correct it. If the problem has

stranded you on the side of the road,

you may be able to get going again.

If not, you will also find instructions

on getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 266

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 272

Nothing Happens or the Starter

Motor Operates Very

.....................................Slowly . 272

The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 273

................................Jump Starting . 274

............If Your Engine Overheats . 276

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 279

..........Charging System Indicator . 280

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 281

.......................Readiness Codes . 282

...............Brake System Indicator . 283

..................Closing the Moonroof . 284

..............................................Fuses . 285

..........Checking and Replacing . 286

......................Emergency Towing . 290

Taking Care of the Unexpected

265

01/06/02 17:28:22 31S5A610_268

Follow these precautions whenever

you are using the compact spare tire:

Thecompactsparetirehasashorter

tread life than a regular tire. Replace

it when you can see the tread wear

indicator bars. The replacement

should be the same size and design

tire, mounted on the same wheel.

Thecompactsparetireisnot

designed to be mounted on a regular

wheel, and the compact wheel is not

designed for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of the

compact spare tire every time you

check the other tires. It should be

inflated to:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride and

less traction on some road sur-

faces than the regular tire. Use

greater caution while driving on

this tire.

Do not mount snow chains on the

compact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tire

that takes up less space. Use this

sparetireasatemporaryreplace-

ment only. Get your regular tire

repaired or replaced and put it back

on your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact spare

tire is designed especially to fit

your car. Do not use your spare

tire on another vehicle unless it is

thesamemakeandmodel.

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

266

IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK

TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

01/06/02 17:28:33 31S5A610_269

If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it.

Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder

of a busy road is dangerous. Drive

slowly along the shoulder until you

gettoanexitoranareatostopthat

is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the car on firm, level and

non-slippery ground away from

traffic. Put the transmission in

Park (automatic) or Reverse

(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights

and turn the ignition switch to

LOCK (0). Have all the

passengers get out of the car while

you change the tire.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunk

floor mat and the trunk floor by

lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tire out of its well.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

267

SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR

TTOOOOLL KKIITT JJAACCKK

The car can easily roll off the

jack, seriously injuring anyone

underneath.

Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and

never get under the car when it

is supported only by the jack.

01/06/02 17:28:44 31S5A610_270

Turn the jack’s end bracket

counterclockwise to loosen it, then

remove the jack.

Loosen the four wheel nuts 1/2

turn with the wheel wrench.

Find the jacking point nearest the

wheel you are removing. Place the

jack under the jacking point. Turn

the end bracket clockwise until

the top of the jack contacts the

jacking point. Make sure the

jacking point tab is resting in the

jack notch.

6. 7. 8.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

268

JJAACCKK

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH

JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTTSS

01/06/02 17:28:52 31S5A610_271

CONTINUED

Remove the wheel nuts and wheel

cover. The wheel cover cannot be

removed without first removing

the wheel nuts. Do not attempt to

forcibly pry the wheel cover off

with a screwdriver or other tool.

Use the extension and wheel

wrench as shown to raise the car

until the flat tire is off the ground.

Remove the flat tire. Temporarily

place the flat tire on the ground

with the outside surface of the

wheel facing up. You could scratch

the wheel if you put it face down.

9. 10. 11.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

269

WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN

WWHHEEEELL

NNUUTTSS

WWHHEEEELL CCOOVVEERR

WWHHEEEELL NNUUTTSS

01/06/02 17:29:03 31S5A610_272

Lowerthecartothegroundand

remove the jack.

Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,

then tighten them in a crisscross

pattern with the wheel wrench

until the wheel is firmly against

the hub. Do not try to tighten

them fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,

wipeanydirtoffthemounting

surface of the wheel and hub with

a clean cloth. Wipe the hub

carefully,itmaybehotfrom

driving.

12. 13.

14.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

270

BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB

01/06/02 17:29:10 31S5A610_273

Store the wheel cover in the trunk.

Make sure it does not get

scratched or damaged.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in

the same crisscross pattern. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at

the nearest automotive service

facility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in the

spare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from the

wing bolt, turn it over, and put it

back on the bolt.

Securetheflattirebyscrewing

the wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack in the trunk with the

end bracket on the left side. Turn

the jack’s end bracket to lock it in

place. Store the tool kit.

Lower the trunk floor and trunk

floor mat, then close the trunk lid.

15. 16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected

271

WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT

SSPPAACCEERR

CCOONNEE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around the

interiorinacrashandcould

seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.

01/06/02 17:29:23 31S5A610_274

Diagnosing why your engine won’t

start falls into two areas, depending

on what you hear when you turn the

key to START (III):

When you turn the ignition switch to

START (III), you do not hear the

normal noise of the engine trying to

start. You may hear a clicking sound

or series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Check these things:

You hear nothing, or almost

nothing. The engine’s starter

motor does not operate at all, or

operates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motor

operating normally, or the starter

motor sounds like it is spinning

faster than normal, but the engine

does not start up and run.

Check the transmission interlock.

If you have a manual transmission,

the clutch pedal must be pushed

all the way to the floor or the

starter will not operate. With an

automatic transmission, it must be

in Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Turn on the headlights and check

their brightness. If the headlights

are very dim or don’t light at all,

the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START

(III). If the headlights do not dim,

check the condition of the fuses. If

the fuses are OK, there is proba-

bly something wrong with the

electrical circuit for the ignition

switch or starter motor. You will

need a qualified technician to

determine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably or

go out when you try to start the

engine, either the battery is dis-

charged or the connections are

corroded. Check the condition of

the battery and terminal connec-

tions (see page ). You can

then try jump starting the car from

a booster battery (see page ).

290

230

274

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Nothing Happens or the Starter

Motor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

272

01/06/02 17:29:35 31S5A610_275

Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill

need a qualified technician to find

the problem. See

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’s

speed sounds normal, or even faster

than normal, when you turn the

ignition switch to START (III), but

the engine does not run.

Your car has the Immobilizer

System. You should use a

properly-coded master or valet key

to start the engine (see page ).

A key that is not properly coded

will cause the immobilizer system

indicator in the dash panel to blink

rapidly.

Are you using the proper starting

procedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Turn the

ignition switch to ON (II) for a

minute and watch the fuel gauge.

The low fuel level warning light

may not be working, so you were

not reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electrical

problem, such as no power to the

fuel pump. Check all the fuses

(see page ).78

179

286

290

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Emergency

Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting the

Engine

273

01/06/02 17:29:45 31S5A610_276

If your car’s battery has run down,

you may be able to start the engine

by using a booster battery. Although

this seems like a simple procedure,

you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with an

automatic transmission by pushing

or pulling it.

To jump start your car, follow these

directions closely:

Open the hood and check the

physical condition of the battery

(see page ). In very cold

weather, check the condition of

the electrolyte. If it seems slushy

or like ice, do not try jump starting

until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-

sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,

lights, etc.

Put the transmission in Neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

230

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected

274

A battery can explode if you do

not follow the correct procedure,

seriously injuring anyone

nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,

and smoking materials away

from the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the

electrolyte inside can f reeze.

Attempting to jump start with a frozen

battery can cause it to rupture.

01/06/02 17:29:55 31S5A610_277

Connect the second jumper cable

to the negative ( ) terminal on

the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the grounding strap

as shown. Do not connect this

jumper cable to any other part of

the engine.

Connect one jumper cable to the

positive ( ) terminal on your

Honda’s battery. Connect the

other end to the positive ( )

terminal on the booster battery. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start

that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustration show

you the order to connect the jumper

cables.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected

275

BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYY

01/06/02 17:30:06 31S5A610_278

Your car can overheat for several

reasons, such as lack of coolant or a

mechanical problem. The only

indication may be the temperature

gauge climbing to or above the red

mark. Or you may see steam or

spray coming from under the hood.

In either case, you should take

immediate action.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-

ture gauge should stay in the mid-

range under most conditions. It may

go higher if you are driving up a long

steep hill on a very hot day. If it

climbs to the red mark, you should

determine the reason.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables

away from each other and any metal

on the car until all are disconnected.

Otherwise, you may cause an

electrical short.

Once your car is running, discon-

nectthenegativecablefromyour

car, then from the booster battery.

Disconnect the positive cable from

your car, then the booster battery.

Start your car. If the starter motor

still operates slowly, check the

jumper cable connections to make

sure they have good metal-to-

metal contact.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting, If Your Engine Overheats

If Your Engine Overheats

276

Steam and spray from an

overheated engine can

seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam

is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge

pointer at the red mark can cause

serious damage to your engine.

01/06/02 17:30:16 31S5A610_279

CONTINUED

Safely pull to the side of the road.

Put the transmission in Neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

Turn off the heating and cooling

system and all other accessories.

Turn on the hazard warning

indicators.

If you see steam and/or spray

coming from under the hood, turn

off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,

leave the engine running and

watch the temperature gauge. If

the high heat is due to overloading

(climbing a long, steep hill on a

hot day with the A/C running, for

example), the engine should start

to cool down almost immediately.

If it does, wait until the tempera-

ture gauge comes down to the mid-

point then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays at

the red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signs

of steam or spray, then open the

hood.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,

such as a split radiator hose.

Everything is still extremely hot,

so use caution. If you find a leak, it

must be repaired before you

continue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,

check the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below the

MIN mark, add coolant to halfway

between the MIN and MAX marks.

290

169

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If Your Engine Overheats

Emergency

Towing

277

01/06/02 17:30:27 31S5A610_280

If there was no coolant in the

reserve tank, you may also have to

add coolant to the radiator. Let the

engine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-

ture gauge, or lower, before check-

ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavy

cloth, turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise, without pushing

down, to the first stop. This

releases any remaining pressure in

the cooling system. After the

pressure releases, push down on

the cap and turn it until it comes

off.

Start the engine and set the

temperature control dial to

maximum. Add coolant to the

radiator up to the base of the filler

neck. If you do not have the

proper coolant mixture available,

you can add plain water.

Remember to have the cooling

system drained and refilled with

the proper mixture as soon as you

can.

Put the radiator cap back on

tightly. Run the engine and watch

the temperature gauge. If it goes

back to the red mark, the engine

needs repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,

check the coolant level in the

radiator reserve tank. If it has

gone down, add coolant to the

MAX mark. Put the cap back on

tightly.

8. 9.

10.

11.

12.

290

Taking Care of the Unexpected

If Your Engine Overheats

Emergency

Towing

278

Removing the radiator cap

while the engine is hot can

cause the coolant to spray out,

seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before

removing the radiator cap.

01/06/02 17:30:36 31S5A610_281

This indicator should light when the

ignition switch is ON (II), and go out

after the engine starts. It should

never come on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing, it

indicates that the oil pressure

dropped very low for a moment, then

recovered. If the indicator stays on

with the engine running, it shows

that the engine has lost oil pressure

and serious engine damage is

possible. In either case, you should

take immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shut

off the engine. Turn on the hazard

warning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring the

level back to the full mark on the

dipstick (see page ).

Letthecarsitforaminute.Open

the hood and check the oil level

(see page ). Although oil level

and oil pressure are not directly

connected, an engine that is very

low on oil can lose pressure during

cornering and other driving

maneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oil

pressure indicator. If the light

does not go out within ten seconds,

turn off the engine. There is a

mechanical problem that needs to

be repaired before you can

continue driving. (See

on page .)

168

209

290

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Emergency

Towing

279

LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

Running the engine with low oil

pressure can cause serious mechanical

damage almost immediately. Turn of f

the engine as soon as you can safely get

the car stopped.

01/06/02 17:30:46 31S5A610_282

This indicator should come on when

the ignition switch is ON (II), and go

out after the engine starts. If it

comes on brightly when the engine

is running, it indicates that the

charging system has stopped

charging the battery.

By eliminating as much of the

electrical load as possible, you can

drive several miles (kilometers)

before the battery is too discharged

to keep the engine running. Drive to

a service station or garage where

you can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electrical

accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear

defogger, cruise control, etc. Try not

to use other electrically-operated

controls such as the power windows.

Keep the engine running and take

extra care not to stall it. Starting the

engine will discharge the battery

rapidly.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Charging System Indicator

280

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:30:52 31S5A610_283

If you have recently refueled your

car, the cause of this indicator

coming on could be a loose or

missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap

and tighten it until it clicks several

times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is

missing. Tightening the cap will not

make the indicator turn off

immediately; it takes one driving trip.

If the indicator remains on past one

driving trip, or the fuel cap was not

loose or missing, have the car

checked by the dealer as soon as

possible. Drive moderately until the

dealer has inspected the problem.

Avoid full-throttle acceleration and

driving at high speed.

Youshouldalsohavethedealer

inspect your car if this indicator

comes on repeatedly, even though it

may turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator should light when the

ignition switch is ON (II), and go out

after the engine starts. If it comes on

at any other time, it indicates one of

the engine’s emissions control

systems may have a problem. Even

though you may feel no difference in

your car’s performance, it can

reduce your fuel economy and cause

your car to put out excessive

emissions. Continued operation may

cause serious damage.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

281

MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP

If you keep driving with the

malfunction indicator lamp on, you can

damage your car’s emissions controls

and engine. Those repairs may not be

covered by your car’s warranties.

01/06/02 17:31:01 31S5A610_284

Your car has certain ‘‘readiness

codes’’ that are part of the on-board

diagnostics for the emissions

systems. In some states, part of the

emissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are not

set, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has been

disconnected or gone dead, these

codes are erased. It takes several

days of driving under various

conditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for a

state emissions test until the

readiness codes are set. Refer to

State Emissions Testing for more

information. (See page .)

To check if they are set, turn the

ignition ON (II), but do not start the

engine. The Malfunction Indicator

Lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If

it then goes off, the readiness codes

are set. If it blinks 5 times, the

readiness codes are not set.

305

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Readiness Codes

282

01/06/02 17:31:08 31S5A610_285

Slow down by shifting to a lower

gear, and pull to the side of the road

when it is safe. Because of the

longer distance needed to stop, it is

hazardous to drive the car. You

should have it towed, and repaired as

soon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the car a short

distance in this condition, drive

slowly and cautiously.

If it comes on at any other time, it

indicates a problem with the car’s

brake system. In most cases, the

problem is a low fluid level in the

brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on

the brake pedal to see if it feels

normal. If it does, check the brake

fluid level the next time you stop at a

service station (see page ). If the

fluid level is low, take the car to your

dealer and have the brake system

inspected for leaks or worn brake

pads.

However, if the brake pedal does not

feel normal, you should take

immediate action. Because of the

brake system’s dual-circuit design, a

problem in one part of the system

will still give you braking at two

wheels. You will feel the brake pedal

go down much farther before the car

begins to slow down, and you will

have to press harder on the pedal.

The distance needed to stop will be

much longer.

The Brake System Indicator

normallycomesonwhenyouturn

the ignition switch ON (II). It is a

reminder to check the parking brake.

It comes on and stays lit if you do not

fully release the parking brake.

222

290

Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

283

UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn

BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR

01/06/02 17:31:16 31S5A610_286

Use a screwdriver or coin to

remove the round plug in the

center of the headliner.

Remove the wrench. Replace the

round plug.

If the electric motor will not close

the moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page ). If the fuse

is blown, replace it with one of the

same or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the

moonroof motor still does not

operate, you can close the

moonroof manually.

Insert the moonroof wrench into

the socket behind this plug. Turn

the wrench until the moonroof is

fully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out of

the tool kit in the trunk.

286

Closing the Moonroof

Taking Care of the Unexpected

284

RROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG

SSOOCCKKEETT

01/06/02 17:31:28 31S5A610_287

All the electrical circuits in your car

have fuses to protect them from a

short circuit or overload. These

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is underneath

the steering column. To open it, turn

the knobs as shown.

The under-hood fuse box is located

in the engine compartment on the

passenger’s side. To open it, push

thetabsasshown.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

285

TTAABB

UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODD IINNTTEERRIIOORR

01/06/02 17:31:36 31S5A610_288

If something electrical in your car

stops working, the first thing you

should check for is a blown fuse.

Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on the

fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses

control that component. Check those

fuses first, but check all the fuses

before deciding that a blown fuse is

not the cause. Replace any blown

fuses and check the component’s

operation.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK

(0). Make sure the headlights and

all other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

Check each of the large fuses in

the under-hood fuse box by

looking through the top at the wire

inside. Removing these fuses

requires a Phillips-head screw-

driver.

Check the smaller fuses in the

under-hood fuse box and all the

fuses in the interior fuse box by

pulling out each fuse with the fuse

puller provided in the under-hood

fuse box.

288 289

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

286

FFUUSSEE

BBLLOOWWNN

FFUUSSEE PPUULLLLEERR

01/06/02 17:31:47 31S5A610_289

Look for a burned wire inside the

fuse. If it is burned, replace it with

oneofthesparefusesofthesame

rating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The

nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou

will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency

display. Use the Preset buttons to

enter the five-digit code (see page

If the replacement fuse of the

same rating blows in a short time,

there is probably a serious

electrical problem in your car.

Leave the blown fuse in that

circuit and have your car checked

by a qualified mechanic.

When the audio system is disabled,

the clock setting in the audio system

will be canceled. You will need to

reset the clock according to the

instructions of the audio system.

If you cannot drive the car without

fixing the problem, and you do not

have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the

same rating or a lower rating from

one of the other circuits. Make sure

youcandowithoutthatcircuit

temporarily (such as the accessory

power socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with a

spare fuse that has a lower rating, it

might blow out again. This does not

indicate anything wrong. Replace the

fuse with one of the correct rating as

soon as you can.

157

CONTINUED

On all models

On the U.S. EX, and Canadian LX and

DX-GOP models

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

287

BBLLOOWWNN

Replacing a fuse with one that has a

higher rating greatly increases the

chances of damaging the electrical

system. If you do not have a replace-

ment fuse with the proper rating for the

circuit, install one with a lower rating.

01/06/02 17:31:58 31S5A610_290

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

20 A

15 A

7.5 A

20 A

10 A

15 A

20 A

10 A

40 A

30 A

40 A

15 A

20 A

15 A

80 A

40 A

Condenser Fan

Small Light

Interior Light

Cooling Fan

Hazard

FI ECU

Horn, Stop

ABS F/S

Back Up

ABS Motor

Rear Defroster

Heater Motor

Power Window

Option

Left Headlight

Door Lock

Right Headlight

Not Used

Battery

Ignition 1

Spare Fuses

21 25

7.5A 30A

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

288

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

01/06/02 17:32:05 31S5A610_291

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

: On Canadian models

15 A

20 A

10 A

Ignition Coil

LAF Heater

Daytime running lights

Alternator

Not Used

7.5 A

20 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

7.5 A

20 A

Power Window Relay

Moonroof

Accessory, Radio

Not Used

Meter

ABS

Daytime running lights

SRS

Remote Control Mirrors

Not Used

Fuel Pump

Accessory Power Socket

Turn Signal Lights

Front Wiper

Not Used

Front Right Power Window

Front Left Power Window

Rear Left Power Window

Rear Right Power Window

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected

289

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

01/06/02 17:32:14 31S5A610_292

The tow

truck uses two pivoting arms that go

under the tires (front or rear) and lift

them off the ground. The other two

tires remain on the ground.

If your car needs to be towed, call a

professional towing service or, if you

belong to one, an organization that

provides roadside assistance. Never

tow your car behind another vehicle

with just a rope or chain. It is very

dangerous.

There are three popular types of

professional towing equipment.

The operator

loads your car on the back of a truck.

Release the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to Neutral.

The tow

truck uses metal cables with hooks

on the ends. These hooks go around

parts of the frame or suspension and

the cables lift that end of the car off

the ground. Your car’s suspension

and body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transported

by flat-bed, it should be towed by

wheel-lift equipment with the front

wheels off the ground. If due to

damage, your car must be towed

with the front wheels on the ground,

do the following:

Release the parking brake.

Start the engine.

ShifttoD,thentoN.

Turn off the engine.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Wheel-lift Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is

an acceptable way to tow your

Honda.

This is the best way to transport

your Honda.

This method of towing is

unacceptable.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected

290

Improper towing preparation will

damage the transmission. Follow the

above procedure exactly. If you cannot

shift the transmission or start the

engine (automatic transmission), your

car must be transported with the f ront

wheels of f the ground.

01/06/02 17:32:26 31S5A610_293

If you decide to tow your car with all

four wheels on the ground, make

sure you use a properly-designed and

attached tow bar. Prepare the car for

towing as described above, and leave

the ignition switch in Accessory (I)

so the steering wheel does not lock.

Make sure the radio and any items

plugged into the accessory power

socket are turned off so they do not

rundownthebattery.

With the front wheels on the ground,

it is best to tow the car no farther

than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the

speedbelow35mph(55km/h).

If your car is equipped with a front

spoiler, remove it before towing so it

is not damaged.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected

291

Trying to lift or tow your car by the

bumpers will cause serious damage.

The bumpers are not designed to

support the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged if

the steering wheel is locked. Leave the

ignition switch in Accessory (I), and

make sure the steering wheel turns

freely before you begin towing.

01/06/02 17:32:34 31S5A610_294

292

01/06/02 17:32:35 31S5A610_295

Thediagramsinthissectiongive

you the dimensions and capacities of

your Honda, and the locations of the

identification numbers. It also

includes information you should

know about your vehicle’s tires and

emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 294

................................Specifications . 296

DOT Tire Quality Grading

.............................(U.S.Cars) .298

.................................Treadwear . 298

......................................Traction . 298

.............................Temperature . 299

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 300

......Driving in Foreign Countries . 301

.......................Emissions Controls . 302

.....................The Clean Air Act . 302

Crankcase Emissions Control

....................................System . 302

Evaporative Emissions Control

....................................System . 302

Onboard Refueling Vapor

................................Recovery . 302

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 303

....................PGM-FI System . 303

Ignition Timing Control

................................System . 303

Exhaust Gas Recirculation

...................(EGR) System . 303

Three Way Catalytic

...........................Converter . 303

....................Replacement Parts . 303

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 304

..............State Emissions Testing . 305

Technical Information

293

01/06/02 17:32:41 31S5A610_296

Your car has several identifying

numbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your

Honda dealer uses to register your

car for warranty purposes. It is also

necessary for licensing and insuring

your car. The easiest place to find

the VIN is on a plate fastened to the

top of the dashboard. You can see it

by looking through the windshield

on the driver’s side. It is also on the

Certification label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on

the engine compartment bulkhead.

The VIN is also provided in bar code

on the Certification label.

Identification Numbers

Technical Information

294

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL

01/06/02 17:32:46 31S5A610_297

The Engine Number is stamped into

the engine block.

The Transmission Number is on a

label on top of the transmission.

Identification Numbers

Technical Information

295

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR

MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

NNUUMMBBEERR

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR

01/06/02 17:32:53 31S5A610_298

Specifications

Technical Information

296

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

174.6 in (4,435 mm)

67.3 in (1,710 mm)

56.9 in (1,445 mm)

103.1 in (2,620 mm)

57.9 in (1,470 mm)

2.95 x 3.72 in (75.0 x 94.4 mm)

13.2 US gal (50 , 11.0 Imp gal)

1.03 US gal (3.9 , 0.86 Imp gal)

102 cu-in (1.668 cm )

9.5

9.9

Length

Width

Height

Wheelbase

Track

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached

to the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

BorexStroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke

SOHC , SOHC VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine

Fuel tank

Engine

coolant

Engine oil

Automatic

transmission

fluid

1.06 US gal (4.0 , 0.88 Imp gal)

1.35 US gal (5.1 , 1.12 Imp gal)

1.32 US gal (5.0 , 1.10 Imp gal)

3.4 US qt (3.2 , 2.8 Imp qt)

3.7 US qt (3.5 , 3.1 Imp qt)

3.2 US qt (3.0

, 2.6 Imp qt)

3.5 US qt (3.3

, 2.9 Imp qt)

4.4 US qt (4.2 , 3.7 Imp qt)

1.6 US qt (1.5

, 1.3 Imp qt)

1.7 US qt (1.6

, 1.4 Imp qt)

2.9 US qt (2.7 , 2.4 Imp qt)

6.2 US qt (5.9

, 5.2 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)

4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the

engine.

Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 , 0.09 Imp gal)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

See spark plug maintenance

section page 229 .

Front

Rear

Approx.

1 : DX, LX

2:EX

DX, LX

Change

Manual

Automatic

Total

Manual

Automatic

Change

Without filter

Total

Change

Total

Change

Total

U.S. Cars

Canada Cars

Manual trans-

mission fluid

Including filter

Windshield

washer reservoir

01/06/02 17:33:13 31S5A610_299

Specifications

Technical Information

297

Battery

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Lights

Air Conditioning

HFC-134a (R-134a)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

SP-10

12 V

60/55 W (HB2)

21/5 W

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )12 V 5 W

12 V 8 W

12 V 5 W

12 V 8 W

12 V 3 CP

12 V 21 W

12 V 3 CP

12 V 21 W

12 V 21/5 W

12 V 21 W

12 V 3 CP

12 V 36 AH/5 HRCapacity

Interior

Under-hood

Size

Pressure

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 1°33’

0°50’

0°

0.00 in (0.0 mm)

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

T115/70D14 88M

P185/65R15 86H

P185/70R14 87S

Headlights (HI/LO)

Front turn signal/side marker

lights

Front parking light

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/Taillights/Rear side

marker lights

Back-up lights

Taillights

High-mount brake light

License plate lights

Ceiling light

Front ceiling light

Spotlights

Trunk light

Refrigerant type

Charge quantity

Lubricant oil type

0.08 in (2.0 mm)

T125/70D15 95M

See page 289 or the fuse label

attached to the inside of the fuse

box door under the steering

column.

See page 288 or the fuse box

cover.

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

1:EX

2:LX

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/Rear

Spare

1 : US: DX, LX

Canada: DX

2:US:EX

Canada: LX

3 : US: DX, LX without ABS

Canada: DX

4 : US: EX, LX with ABS

Canada: LX

1 3

01/06/02 17:33:37 31S5A610_300

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government

test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-

half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual condi-

tions of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on

specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction

performance.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.

Federal Safety Requirements. All

tires are also graded for treadwear,

traction, and temperature perform-

ance according to Department of

Transportation (DOT) standards.

The following explains these

gradings.

All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between the tread shoulder and the

maximum section width. For

example:

Warning: The traction grade

assignedtothistireisbasedon

straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Technical Information

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

298

01/06/02 17:33:48 31S5A610_301

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce

tire life, and excessive temperature

can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the

minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for

this tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Technical Information

Temperature A,B,C

299

01/06/02 17:33:53 31S5A610_302

Some conventional gasolines are

being blended with alcohol or an

ether compound. These gasolines

are collectively referred to as

oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air

standards, some areas of the United

States and Canada use oxygenated

fuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, be

sure it is unleaded and meets the

minimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, try

to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some

states/provinces require this

informationtobepostedonthe

pump.

If you notice any undesirable

operating symptoms, try another

service station or switch to another

brand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performance

problems resulting from the use of

an oxygenated fuel containing more

than the percentages of oxygenates

given above are not covered under

warranty.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)

You may use gasoline containing up

to 10 percent ethanol by volume.

Gasoline containing ethanol may be

marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA and

Canadian CGSB approved

percentages of oxygenates:

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether)

You may use gasoline containing up

to 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(methyl or wood

alcohol)

Your vehicle was not designed to use

fuel that contains methanol.

Methanol can corrode metal parts in

the fuel system, and also damage

plastic and rubber components. This

damage would not be covered by

your warranties.

Technical Information

Oxygenated Fuels

ETHANOL

MTBE

METHANOL

300

01/06/02 17:34:03 31S5A610_303

If you are planning to take your

Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,

contact the tourist bureaus in the

areas you will be traveling in to find

out about the availability of unleaded

gasoline with the proper octane

rating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,

be aware that using leaded gasoline

in your Honda will affect perfor-

mance and fuel mileage, and damage

its emissions controls. It will no

longer comply with U.S. and

Canadian emissions regulations, and

will be illegal to operate in North

America. To bring your car back into

compliance will require the replace-

ment of several components, such as

theoxygensensorsandthethree

way catalytic converter. These re-

placements are not covered under

warranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries

Technical Information

301

01/06/02 17:34:08 31S5A610_304

In Canada, Honda vehicles comply

with the Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (CMVSS) for

Emissions valid at the time they are

manufactured.

The United States Clean Air Act

sets standards for automobile

emissions. It also requires that

automobile manufacturers explain to

owners how their emissions controls

workandwhattodotomaintain

them. This section summarizes how

the emissions controls work.

Scheduled maintenance is on page

The burning of gasoline in your car’s

engine produces several byproducts.

Some of these are carbon monoxide

(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and

hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline

evaporating from the tank also

produces hydrocarbons. Controlling

the production of NOx, CO, and HC

is important to the environment.

Under certain conditions of sunlight

and climate, NOx and HC react to

form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon

monoxide does not contribute to

smog creation, but it is a poisonous

gas.

Your car has a Positive Crankcase

Ventilation System. This keeps

gasses that build up in the engine’s

crankcase from going into the

atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase

Ventilation valve routes them from

the crankcase back to the intake

manifold. They are then drawn into

the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel

tank, an evaporative emissions

control canister filled with charcoal

adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this

canister while the engine is off. After

the engine is started and warmed up,

the vapor is drawn into the engine

and burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery (ORVR) system captures

the fuel vapors during refueling. The

vapors are adsorbed in a canister

filled with activated carbon. While

driving, the fuel vapors are drawn

into the engine and burned off.

200

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions Control

System

Evaporative Emissions Control

System

Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery

Technical Information

Emissions Controls

302

01/06/02 17:34:19 31S5A610_305

The emissions control systems are

covered by warranties separate from

the rest of your car. Read your

warranty manual for more informa-

tion.

The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-

gether in reducing emissions to

levels that comply with the Clean Air

Act. To make sure the emissions

remain low, you should use only new

Genuine Honda replacement parts or

their equivalent for repairs. Using

lowerqualitypartsmayincreasethe

emissions from your car.

The exhaust emissions controls

include three or four systems: PGM-

FI, Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust

Gas Recirculation (SOHC VTEC

engine only), and Three Way

Catalytic Converter. These three or

four systems work together to

control the engine’s combustion and

minimize the amount of HC, CO, and

NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The

exhaust emissions control systems

are separate from the crankcase and

evaporative emissions control

systems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.

It has three subsystems: Air Intake,

Engine Control, and Fuel Control.

The Engine Control Module (ECM)

or the Powertrain Control Module

(PCM) uses various sensors to

determine how much air is going

into the engine. It then controls how

much fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts the

ignition timing, reducing the amount

of HC, CO and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation

(EGR) system takes some of the

exhaust gas and routes it back into

the intake manifold. Adding exhaust

gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces

the amount of NOx produced when

the fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter is

in the exhaust system. Through

chemical reactions, it converts HC,

CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust

to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen

(N ), and water vapor.

On EX model only

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls

Emissions Controls

Technical Information

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)

System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

303

01/06/02 17:34:32 31S5A610_306

The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve

as catalysts, promoting chemical

reactions to convert the exhaust

gasses without affecting the metals.

The catalytic converter is referred to

as a three-way catalyst, since it acts

on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement

unit must be an original Honda part

or its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded

gasoline can contaminate the

catalyst metals, making the three

way catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic converter

must operate at a high temperature

for the chemical reactions to take

place. It can set on fire any com-

bustible materials that come near it.

Park your car away from high grass,

dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalytic

converter contributes to air pollution,

and can impair your engine’s per-

formance. Follow these guidelines to

protect your car’s three way catalytic

converter.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your car diagnosed and

repaired if it is misfiring, back-

firing, stalling, or otherwise not

running properly.

(EX) (DX, LX)

Technical Information

Three Way Catalytic Converter

304

TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR

01/06/02 17:34:41 31S5A610_307

CONTINUED

If you take your vehicle for a state

emissions test shortly after the

battery has been disconnected or

gone dead, it may not pass the test.

This is because of certain ‘‘readiness

codes’’ that must be set in the on-

board diagnostics for the emissions

systems. These codes are erased

when the battery is disconnected,

and set again only after several days

of driving under a variety of

conditions.

If the testing facility determines that

the readiness codes are not set, you

will be requested to return at a later

date to complete the test. If you must

get the vehicle re-tested within the

next two or three days, you can

condition the vehicle for re-testing

by doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,

but not completely, full (around

3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has been

parked with the engine off for 8

hours or more.

Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 20° and

95°F.

Without touching the accelerator

pedal, start the engine and let it

idle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park

(automatic transmission) or

Neutral (manual transmission).

Increase the engine speed to 2,000

rpm and hold it there until the

temperature gauge rises to at least

1/4ofthescale(approximately3

minutes).

Technical Information

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions Testing

305

01/06/02 17:34:51 31S5A610_308

Then drive in city/suburban

traffic for at least 10 minutes.

When traffic conditions allow, let

the vehicle coast for several

seconds without using the

accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal.

If the testing facility determines the

readiness codes are still not set, see

your Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveled

major highway where you can

maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph

(80to97km/h)foratleast20

minutes. Drive on the highway in

D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use

thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic

allows, drive for 90 seconds

without moving the accelerator

pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary

slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot

do this for a continuous 90

seconds because of traffic

conditions, drive for at least 30

seconds, then repeat it two more

times (for a total of 90 seconds).

Technical Information

State Emissions Testing

306

01/06/02 17:34:58 31S5A610_309

Customer Relations

................................Information . 308

....................Warranty Coverages . 309

Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 310

.....................Authorized Manuals . 311

Warranty and Customer Relations

307

01/06/02 17:35:01 31S5A610_310

When you call or write, please give

us this information:

Honda dealership personnel are

trained professionals. They should

be able to answer all your questions.

If you encounter a problem that your

dealership does not solve to your

satisfaction, please discuss it with

the dealership’s management. The

Service Manager or General

Manager can help. Almost all

problems are solved in this way.

Vehicle Identification Number

(see page )

Name and address of the dealer

who services your car

Date of purchase

Mileage on your car

Your name, address, and tele-

phone number

A detailed description of the

problem

Name of the dealer who sold the

car to you

If you are dissatisfied with the

decision made by the dealership’s

management, contact your Honda

Customer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands:

294

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Relations Information

308

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.

715 Milner Avenue

Toronto, ON

M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4318

American Honda Motor Co.

Honda Consumer Affairs

Department

Mail Stop 500-2N-7D

1919 Torrance Boulevard

Torrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

01/06/02 17:35:12 31S5A610_311

Your new Honda is covered by these

warranties:

provides prorated

coverage for a replacement battery

purchased from a Honda dealer.

a seat

belt that fails to function properly is

coveredfortheusefullifeofthe

vehicle.

covers all genuine

Honda replacement parts against

defects in materials and workman-

ship.

Genuine Honda Accessories are

covered under this warranty. Time

and mileage limits depend on the

type of accessory and other factors.

Please read your warranty manual

for details.

all exterior body panels are

covered for rust-through from the

inside for the specified time period

with no mileage limit.

provides

coverageforaslongasthepur-

chaser of the muffler owns the car.

covers your new vehicle, except for

the battery, emissions control

systems and accessories, against

defects in materials and

workmanship.

this warranty gives up

to 100 percent credit toward a

replacement battery.

these two

warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-

sions control systems. Time, mileage,

and coverage are conditional. Please

read the warranty manual for exact

information.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to

all these warranties. Please read the

2002 Honda Warranty Information

booklet that came with your car for

precise information on warranty

coverages. Your Honda’s original

tires are covered by their

manufacturer. Tire warranty infor-

mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2002 Warranty

Manual that came with your car.

Replacement Battery Limited

Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited

Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime

Limited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery Limited

Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects

Warranty and Emissions

Performance Warranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations

309

01/06/02 17:35:26 31S5A610_312

To contact NHTSA, you may either

call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in

Washington D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of

Transportation, Washington,

D.C. 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor

vehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition

to notifying American Honda Motor

Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become

involved in individual problems

between you, your dealer, or

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations

310

01/06/02 17:35:32 31S5A610_313

The following publications covering the operation and

servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm

Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,

for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number

on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,

contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,

Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should

contact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals

(U.S. only)

311

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61S5A03

61S5A03EL

61S5A30

31S5A610

HON-R

Form Description

2001 2002 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Service Manual

2001 2002 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2001 2002 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Body Repair Manual

2002 Honda Civic 4 Door

Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$68.00

$48.00

$42.00

$32.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBER

VEHICLE MODEL

Name Year

Qty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring

obligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can

pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to

Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without

notice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please

allow adequate time for delivery.

01/06/02 17:35:44 31S5A610_314

This manual describes the procedures involved in the

replacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommended

procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.

It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple

enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-

stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual by

providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each

electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

312

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,

and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should

be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown

below for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name

Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip Code

City

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.

Do not send cash

Master

Card

VISA Check here if your billing address is different

from the shipping address shown above.

Account Number

Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

()

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14

days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

01/06/02 17:35:56 31S5A610_315

CONTINUED

Battery

Charging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 280

............................Jump Starting . 274

..............................Maintenance . 230

............................Specifications . 297

..............................Before Driving . 163

....................................Belts,Seat .8,45

.............................Beverage Holder . 99

.................................Body Repairs . 264

Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 189

.............Break-in, New Linings . 164

....................Bulb Replacement . 250

...........................................Fluid . 222

.........................................Parking . 97

.................System Indicator . 62, 283

........................Wear Indicators . 188

.............................Braking System . 188

........................Break-in, New Car . 164

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 71

........................Brights, Headlights . 70

Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 251

..............................Brake Lights . 250

..............................Ceiling Light . 254

................Front Parking Lights . 248

........Front Side Marker Lights . 248

.................................Headlights . 247

.........High-mount Brake Light . 251

.................License Plate Lights . 252

.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 250

............................Specifications . 297

...................................Spotlights . 255

...............................Trunk Light . 253

...Accessories and Modifications . 171

................................Accessories . 171

.Additional Safety Precautions . 172

............................Modifications . 172

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 81

.............Accessory Power Socket . 101

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 210

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 48

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 225

..............Air Conditioning System . 106

..............................Maintenance . 234

.........................................Usage . 106

.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 108

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 238

..................High Speed Driving . 239

.........................Normal Driving . 239

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 300

......................................Antifreeze . 213

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 62, 191

...................................Operation . 189

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 157

Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 80

..........................Appearance Care . 257

................Audio System . 114, 126, 138

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 46

.............Automatic Speed Control . 159

..............Automatic Transmission . 182

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 296

...............Checking Fluid Level . 220

.......................................Shifting . 183

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 182

................Shift Lever Positions . 183

....................Shift Lock Release . 186

Index

01/06/02 17:36:02 31S5A610_316

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii

...................................Dashboard . 2, 58

................Daytime Running Lights . 71

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 310

........................Defog and Defrost . 111

................Defogger, Rear Window . 75

..............Defrosting the Windows . 111

....................................Dimensions . 296

...............Dimming the Headlights . 70

Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 220

..................................Engine Oil . 168

..........................Directional Signals . 72

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 188

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 212

Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 81

......................Power Door Locks . 82

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 298

............................Capacities Chart . 296

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

.............................Carrying Cargo . 173

Cassette Player

............................................Care . 156

...................Operation . 120, 132, 153

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..................CD Changer . 123, 135, 149

......................CD Player . 123, 135, 147

..................................Ceiling Light . 102

........................Certification Label . 294

............................................Chains . 244

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

............Changing Engine Coolant . 215

Changing Oil

........................................How to . 211

......................................When to . 200

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 280

............Checklist, Before Driving . 178

.....................................Child Safety . 22

Child Seats

......LATCH Anchorage System . 43

...........................Lower Anchors . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42

..................Childproof Door Locks . 86

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 225

Cleaning

......................................Exterior . 258

.......................................Interior . 260

...................................Seat Belts . 261

...........................................Vinyl . 261

....................................Windows . 262

.........Clock, Setting the . 119, 131, 143

...................................Clutch Fluid . 223

........................CO in the Exhaust . 302

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 179

..............................Compact Spare . 266

...............Consumer Information . 308

.............Controls, Instruments and . 57

Coolant

........................................Adding . 213

....................................Checking . 169

.........................Proper Solution . 213

...................................Replacing . 215

...................Temperature Gauge . 68

....................Corrosion Protection . 263

Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 302

............Cruise Control Operation . 159

..........Customer Relations Office . 308

Bulb Replacement

....................Turn Signal Lights . 248

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 247

Index

01/06/02 17:36:08 31S5A610_317

CONTINUED

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual

.............................Transmission . 180

.....................................Drive Belts . 237

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 177

....................................Economy . 170

.........................In Bad Weather . 192

................In Foreign Countries . 301

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

..............................Economy, Fuel . 170

............Emergencies on the Road . 265

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 274

...........Brake System Indicator . 283

................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

.....Charging System Indicator . 280

..................Checking the Fuses . 286

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 279

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 281

...Manually Closing Moonroof . 284

..................Overheated Engine . 276

...........................Emergency Brake . 97

......................Emergency Flashers . 74

......................Emergency Towing . 290

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 87

.......................Emissions Controls . 302

.............Emissions Testing, State . 305

Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68

.................................Drive Belts . 237

......Engine Speed Limiter . 181, 185

Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 63, 281

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 279

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 209

...............................Overheating . 276

............................Specifications . 296

.......................................Starting . 179

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 300

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 302

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 20

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 258

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 261

...................................Fan, Interior . 106

Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 105

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 165

Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 225

.........................Dust and pollen . 235

...............................................Oil . 211

5-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 221

................................Shifting the . 180

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 267

Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 220

..........................................Brake . 222

.........................................Clutch . 223

..............Manual Transmission . 221

..........................Power Steering . 224

..................Windshield Washer . 219

FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 145

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 91

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 301

..........................Four-way Flashers . 74

............................Front Airbags . 10, 48

Index

III

01/06/02 17:36:15 31S5A610_318

.................................................Fuel . 164

......................Fill Door and Cap . 165

...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 164

...............................Oxygenated . 300

........................Reserve Indicator . 63

........................Tank, Filling the . 165

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 285

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 170

..........................................Gasohol . 300

.........................................Gasoline . 164

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 63

...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 164

........................Tank, Filling the . 165

................Gas Station Procedures . 165

Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68

...............................................Fuel . 67

...............................Speedometer . 66

.................................Tachometer . 66

Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 183

5-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 180

..............................Glass Cleaning . 262

........................................Glove Box . 98

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 247

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74

Headlights

........................................Aiming . 247

............Daytime Running Lights . 71

..................High Beam Indicator . 63

........................Reminder Beeper . 70

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 247

...................................Turning on . 70

..............................Head Restraints . 90

.....................Heating and Cooling . 106

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 179

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 70

..............High-mount Brake Light . 251

....................................Hood Latch . 226

.......................Hood, Opening the . 166

..................................................Horn . 69

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 223

.................................Hydroplaning . 193

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 294

Ignition

..............................................Keys . 77

...........................................Switch . 80

............Timing Control System . 303

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

Indicators, Instrument

.............................................Panel . 59

...............................Infant Restraint . 31

Infant Seats

......LATCH Anchorage System . 43

...........................Lower Anchors . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 238

..................High Speed Driving . 239

.........................Normal Driving . 239

...................................Inside Mirror . 96

.............................Inspection, Tire . 240

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 58

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71

...........................Interior Cleaning . 260

...............................Interior Lights . 102

........................................Introduction . i

Index

01/06/02 17:36:21 31S5A610_319

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 77

........................Jacking up the Car . 268

.......................................Jack, Tire . 267

................................Jump Starting . 274

..................................Maintenance . 195

...Owner Maintenance Checks . 207

.................................Record . 205-206

......................Required Indicator . 64

..........................................Safety . 196

.............................Schedule . 198-204

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 63, 281

...................Manual Transmission . 180

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 221

...............................Meters, Gauges . 66

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 300

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 96

.........................................Moonroof . 95

......................Closing Manually . 284

.....................................Operation . 95

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 164

.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 67

Oil

........................Change, How to . 211

......................Change, When to . 200

......................Checking Engine . 168

..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 279

Selecting Proper Viscosity

......................................Chart . 210

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81

Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 302

...................Neutral Gear Position . 184

..................New Vehicle Break-in . 164

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 181

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 294

.......................Label, Certification . 294

.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 45

...........LATCH Anchorage System . 43

Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 247

.......................................Indicator . 59

.........................................Parking . 70

..................................Turn Signal . 72

.....................................Load Limit . 174

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80

Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80

............................Fuel Fill Door . 165

.................................Power Door . 82

...........................................Trunk . 86

........................Low Coolant Level . 169

.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 63

................................Lower Anchors . 43

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 181

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 279

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 296

.........................................Luggage . 173

Index

01/06/02 17:36:30 31S5A610_320

..Operation in Foreign Countries . 301

..............................Outside Mirrors . 96

....................Overheating, Engine . 276

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 207

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 300

...................Radiator Overheating . 276

Radio/CD/Cassette

...........Sound System . 114, 126, 138

...................Readiness Codes . 282, 305

Rear Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 250, 251

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 91

............................Rear View Mirror . 96

.................Rear Window Defogger . 75

...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 88

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 181

.............................Reminder Lights . 59

.......................Remote Transmitter . 83

Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 225

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

..........................Engine Coolant . 215

................Engine Oil and Filter . 211

..........................................Fuses . 286

................................Light Bulbs . 247

....................................Schedule . 198

................................Spark Plugs . 227

................................Timing Belt . 237

...........................................Tires . 242

.............................Wiper Blades . 232

Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 47

Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 169, 213

...............................Restraint, Child . 22

..................Reverse Gear Position . 184

................................Rotation, Tire . 241

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 45

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 310

.................................Safety Features . 7

.........................................Airbags . 10

..................................Door Locks . 11

..........................Head Restraints . 11

.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55

..............................Paint Touch-up . 259

..............Panel Brightness Control . 71

........................Park Gear Position . 183

...........................................Parking . 187

.................................Parking Brake . 97

Parking Brake and Brake System

.......................................Indicator . 62

.................................Parking Lights . 70

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 304

.............................PGM-FI System . 303

..................Polishing and Waxing . 259

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 20

............................Protecting Adults . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20

........................Protecting Children . 22

.......................Protecting Infants . 31

.......Protecting Larger Children . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 35

Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 42

.............................Using LATCH . 43

Index

01/06/02 17:36:36 31S5A610_321

CONTINUED

.....................................Tachometer . 66

Taillights, Changing

..................................Bulbs . 250, 251

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 265

...................Tape Player . 120, 132, 153

...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 45

...............Additional Information . 45

Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 46

.....................................Cleaning . 261

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 45

................................Maintenance . 47

......Reminder Light and Beeper . 61

...................System Components . 45

...............Use During Pregnancy . 20

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 88

...............................Serial Number . 294

...........................Service Intervals . 198

...........................Service Manual . 311

.........Service Station Procedures . 165

..........Setting the Clock . 119, 131, 143

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 182

........................Shift Lock Release . 186

..............................Side Airbags . 10, 50

...................Cut-off Indicator . 52, 61

Side Marker Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 248, 250

...............................Signaling Turns . 72

.....................................Snow Tires . 243

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 258

................Sound System . 114, 126, 138

Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 266

............................Specifications . 297

................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 227

....................Specifications Charts . 296

................................Speed Control . 159

...................................Speedometer . 66

.......................................Spotlights . 103

..........SRS, Additional Information . 48

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53

.............................Airbag Service . 53

How the Side Airbag Cut-off

...........Indicator Light Works . 52

How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 51

How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 48

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50

........................SRS Components . 48

.............................SRS Indicator . 51, 61

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81

..............State Emissions Testing . 305

.......................Starting the Engine . 179

In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 179

................With a Dead Battery . 274

........Steam Coming from Engine . 276

Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 76

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80

...Stereo Sound System . 114, 126, 138

...........................Storing Your Car . 256

Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 10, 48

......................................Servicing . 53

.........................SRS Indicator . 51, 61

...................System Components . 48

..................................Synthetic Oil . 210

Index

VII

01/06/02 17:36:42 31S5A610_322

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 174

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 296

....Vehicle Identification Number . 294

.............................Vehicle Storage . 256

.....................................Ventilation . 109

.................................................VIN . 294

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 261

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 210

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55

..................Warranty Coverages . 309

Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 219

.......................................Indicator . 63

Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 298

.....Emissions Control Systems . 302

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 300

Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 304

.......................Temperature Gauge . 68

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 42

............................Theft Protection . 157

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 304

..........Time, Setting the . 119, 131, 143

....................................Timing Belt . 237

....................................Tire Chains . 244

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 267

...............................................Tires . 238

..............................Air Pressure . 238

.........................Checking Wear . 240

..........................Compact Spare . 266

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 298

......................................Inflation . 238

..................................Inspection . 240

..............................Maintenance . 240

...................................Replacing . 242

......................................Rotating . 241

...........................................Snow . 243

............................Specifications . 297

................................Tire Chains . 244

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 267

Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 193

..................Emergency Towing . 290

...........................Traction Devices . 244

Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 220

Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 221

..................Fluid Selection . 220, 221

..............Identification Number . 295

.............Shifting the Automatic . 183

..................Shifting the Manual . 180

.....................................Treadwear . 298

.......................................Trip Meter . 67

................................................Trunk . 86

........................................Opening . 86

...................Open Monitor Light . 63

....................................Turn Signals . 72

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 263

Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 265

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 298

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 164

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 260

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 212

Index

VIII

01/06/02 17:36:49 31S5A610_323

.....................................Operation . 74

.........................................Washing . 258

..................Waxing and Polishing . 259

Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 76

............Alignment and Balance . 240

..........................Compact Spare . 266

......................................Wrench . 268

Windows

.....................................Cleaning . 262

..................Operating the Power . 93

...........................Rear, Defogger . 75

Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 72

...................................Defroster . 111

.......................................Washers . 74

Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 232

.....................................Operation . 72

....................................Worn Tires . 240

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 290

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

01/06/02 17:36:52 31S5A610_324

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Brake Fluid:

5-speed Manual Transmission

Fluid:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane

number of 86 or higher.

13.2 US gal (50

, 11.0 Imp gal)

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm

)

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or

DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary

replacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:

Spare Tire:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm

)

API Premium grade 5W-20

detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (including

filter):

3.4 US qt (3.2

, 2.8 Imp qt)

3.7 US qt (3.5

, 3.1 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic

Transmission Fluid) preferred, or

aDEXRON

III ATF as a

temporary replacement (see page

Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid preferred, or an API service

SG, SH or SJ, SAE 10W-30 or

10W-40 motor oil as a temporary

replacement (see page ).

Capacity (including differential):

1.6 US qt (1.5

, 1.3 Imp qt)

Honda Power Steering Fluid

preferred, or another brand of

power steering fluid as a

temporary replacement. Do not

use ATF (see page ).

DX, LX

220

221

224

222

209

01/06/02 17:37:12 31S5A610_325